Sie sind auf Seite 1von 644

NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 STOCK # 200774

Circuit Card Manual

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc. NEAX and D term are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 2000 NEC America, Inc. Printed in the U.S.A

PAGE No. i ii iii iv v vi vii viii ix x xi xii 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 4

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

ISSUE 8

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 1/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 2/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 3/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 4/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 5/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 6/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 7/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No. 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8 DATE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DATE

OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5

DATE

DATE

DATE

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 8/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618

ISSUE No. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PAGE No.

ISSUE No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ISSUE 1 DATE OCTOBER, 2000 ISSUE 5 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE

ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE

ISSUE 4

ISSUE 8

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual

Revision Sheet 9/9

NDA-24296

NDA-24296 ISSUE 1 OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX Circuit Card Manual


TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SN1695 CPRBF-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 PH-DK10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 PH-PC45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 PZ-ME44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

NDA-24296

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)


Page PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 PA-8COTBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 PA-16COTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 PA-CS02-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 PA-CS08-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 PA-8LCBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 PA-16LCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 PA-16LCBJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 PA-16LCBJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 PA-M69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 PA-M103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 PA-8RSTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 PA-2CCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 PA-24CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 PA-2DCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 PA-ILCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 PA-4ILCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 PA-8ILCE-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 PA-4DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 PA-4DATB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 PA-4AMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 PA-8TLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 PA-M87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 PA-24PRTB-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592 PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-3 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 1-4 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 2-18 Figure 2-19 Figure 2-20 Figure 2-21 Figure 2-22 Figure 2-23 Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25 Figure 2-26 Figure 2-27 Figure 2-28 Figure 2-29 Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31 Figure 2-32 Figure 2-33 Title Page

Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Face Layout ofPA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Face Layout ofPA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Face Layout ofPA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Face Layout ofPA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Face Layout ofPA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES
Page iii Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 2-34 Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-37 Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39 Figure 2-40 Figure 2-41 Figure 2-42 Figure 2-43 Figure 2-44 Figure 2-45 Figure 2-46 Figure 2-47 Figure 2-48 Figure 2-49 Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51 Figure 2-52 Figure 2-53 Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55 Figure 2-56 Figure 2-57 Figure 2-58 Figure 2-59 Figure 2-60 Figure 2-61 Figure 2-62 Figure 2-63 Figure 2-63 Figure 2-64 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-66 Figure 2-67 Figure 2-68 Figure 2-69 Figure 2-70 Figure 2-71 Figure 2-72 Figure 2-73 Figure 2-74 Figure 2-75 Figure 2-76 Figure 2-77 Figure 2-78 Title Page

Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 External Interface for PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 External Interface for PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 External Interface for PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 External Interface for PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

LIST OF FIGURES Page iv Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 2-79 Figure 2-80 Figure 2-81 Figure 2-82 Figure 2-83 Figure 2-84 Figure 2-85 Figure 2-86 Figure 2-87 Figure 2-88 Figure 2-89 Figure 2-90 Figure 2-91 Figure 2-92 Figure 2-93 Figure 2-94 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-14 Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-28 Figure 3-29 Title Page 156 157 157 158 159 160 160 162 163 164 164 166 167 168 168 170 172 174 178 179 181 183 184 189 190 192 193 195 201 202 203 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 211 212 217 218 220 221 223 230 231 232

Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connections for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location for PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES Page v Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 Figure 3-35 Figure 3-36 Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38 Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42 Figure 3-43 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47 Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49 Figure 3-50 Figure 3-51 Figure 3-52 Figure 3-53 Figure 3-54 Figure 3-55 Figure 3-56 Figure 3-57 Figure 3-58 Figure 3-59 Figure 3-60 Figure 3-61 Figure 3-62 Figure 3-63 Figure 3-64 Figure 3-65 Figure 3-66 Figure 3-67 Figure 3-68 Figure 3-68 Figure 3-69 Figure 3-70 Figure 3-71 Figure 3-72 Figure 3-72 Title Page 232 233 234 235 236 237 239 240 242 244 245 247 248 250 252 258 259 260 260 262 263 266 268 269 273 275 277 281 283 284 288 289 290 291 293 295 297 300 301 303 305 311 312 313 315 317 321 322

PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8COTBJ (8COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16 COTBE (16COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS02-C (2ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS08 (HMATI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS08-B (HMATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8LCBR (8LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBE (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF FIGURES Page vi Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 3-73 Figure 3-74 Figure 3-75 Figure 3-76 Figure 3-76 Figure 3-77 Figure 3-78 Figure 3-79 Figure 3-80 Figure 3-80 Figure 3-81 Figure 3-82 Figure 3-83 Figure 3-84 Figure 3-84 Figure 3-85 Figure 3-86 Figure 3-87 Figure 3-88 Figure 3-88 Figure 3-89 Figure 3-90 Figure 3-91 Figure 3-91 Figure 3-92 Figure 3-93 Figure 3-94 Figure 3-95 Figure 3-96 Figure 3-97 Figure 3-98 Figure 3-99 Figure 3-99 Figure 3-100 Figure 3-101 Figure 3-102 Figure 3-103 Figure 3-104 Figure 3-105 Figure 3-106 Figure 3-107 Figure 3-108 Figure 3-109 Figure 3-110 Figure 3-111 Figure 3-112 Figure 3-113 Figure 3-114 Figure 3-115 Title Page 323 325 327 330 331 332 334 335 340 341 342 344 345 350 351 352 354 355 358 359 361 362 366 367 368 370 371 378 379 381 382 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 394 396 397 398 399 400 403 405 406 408 409

Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24LCBV (LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Running for LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NCU Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES Page vii Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 3-116 Figure 3-117 Figure 3-118 Figure 3-119 Figure 3-120 Figure 3-121 Figure 3-122 Figure 3-123 Figure 3-124 Figure 3-125 Figure 3-126 Figure 3-127 Figure 3-128 Figure 3-129 Figure 3-130 Figure 3-131 Figure 3-132 Figure 3-133 Figure 3-134 Figure 3-134 Figure 3-135 Figure 3-136 Figure 3-137 Figure 3-138 Figure 3-139 Figure 3-140 Figure 3-141 Figure 3-142 Figure 3-143 Figure 3-144 Figure 3-144 Figure 3-145 Figure 3-145 Figure 3-146 Figure 3-147 Figure 3-148 Figure 3-149 Figure 3-150 Figure 3-151 Figure 3-152 Figure 3-153 Figure 3-154 Figure 3-155 Figure 3-156 Figure 3-156 Figure 3-157 Figure 3-158 Figure 3-159 Figure 3-160 Title Page 411 417 418 424 425 433 435 436 439 440 443 444 445 446 448 450 453 455 459 460 461 462 464 466 468 475 476 479 481 485 486 487 488 490 492 496 497 499 501 506 507 509 511 517 518 519 521 523 527

Face Layout ofPA-8RSTK (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8RSTM (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8RSTY (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection betweenPA-SDTA andPA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-2CCHA (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24CCTA (24CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-2DCHA (2DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-ILCG (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4ILCH (4ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8ILCE-A (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4DATA (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF FIGURES Page viii Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)


Figure Figure 3-161 Figure 3-162 Figure 3-163 Figure 3-164 Figure 3-165 Figure 3-166 Figure 3-167 Figure 3-168 Figure 3-169 Figure 3-170 Figure 3-171 Figure 3-172 Figure 3-172 Figure 3-173 Figure 3-174 Figure 3-175 Figure 3-176 Figure 3-177 Figure 3-178 Figure 3-179 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-180 Figure 3-181 Figure 3-182 Figure 3-183 Figure 3-184 Figure 3-185 Figure 3-186 Figure 3-187 Figure 3-188 Figure 3-189 Figure 3-190 Figure 3-191 Figure 3-192 Figure 3-193 Figure 3-194 Title Page 531 533 537 541 543 545 546 548 550 554 556 564 565 566 567 568 569 571 573 576 577 578 579 580 582 583 589 590 592 594 596 602 603 605 607 609 615 616

Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-4AMPC (4AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-8TLTR (TLT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REC/PGA Connector Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout ofPA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296

LIST OF FIGURES Page ix Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF FIGURES Page x Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

LIST OF TABLES
Table Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Table 3-7 Table 3-8 Table 3-9 Table 3-10 Table 3-11 Table 3-12 Table 3-13 Table 3-14 Table 3-15 Title Page 248 264 354 357 361 441 442 445 467 474 493 528 536 538 584

Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATI Card Lamp Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital PAD Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24296 (E)

CHAPTER 3 Page xi Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3 Page xii Revision 1.0

NDA-24296 (E)

CHAPTER 1
1. GENERAL

INTRODUCTION

This manual provides circuit card descriptions for the NEAX2400 IPX system. This manual is for those persons involved in system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IPX. For each circuit card the following items are explained: General function Slot to mount the circuit card Precautions for mounting the card Location of the electronic devices on the card surface Description of the LED Description of the switches Physical interface

The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card. Control Circuit Card White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs. Line/Trunk Circuit Card Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.
Note:

This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IPX. When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card Manual with the following changes: The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IPX; however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI). The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IPX) is the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS. The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manuals section on PH-PC36 (MUX).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Revision 1.0

2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 11. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown inFigure 1-2. The control circuit cards for the IPX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-3 and 1-4. As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM). The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM. Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.

CHAPTER 1 Page 2 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-SW10(TSW) PH-SW10(TSW) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PIM0

BSCM 00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC40(EMA) (MISC) LPM (MISC) (IOC/MISC) PH-IO24(IOC)

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 3 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400IMS (IPX) 4-IMG System B S C M

PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM IMG0

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM IMG1

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG2

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG3

IMG0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 (MISC) LPM (MISC) (IOC/MISC) PH-PC40(EMA) PH-IO24(IOC)

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)

CHAPTER 1 Page 4 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400IMS (IPX) 4-IMG System B S C M

PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM IMG0

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM IMG1

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG2

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG3

IMG1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PC20(DLKC0)

PH-PC20(DLKC1)

PH-GT09(GT0)

PH-GT09(GT1)

PH-SW12(TDSW00)

PH-SW12(TDSW01)

PH-SW12(TDSW02)

PH-SW12(TDSW03)

PH-SW12(TDSW10)

PH-SW12(TDSW11)

PH-SW12(TDSW12)

PH-SW12(TDSW13)

PH-CK16/17(PLO0)

PH-CK16/17(PLO1)

TSWM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 5 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400IMS(IMX) NEAX2400 IMS (IPX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M

PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM IMG0

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM IMG1

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG2

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG3

IMG2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4)

CHAPTER 1 Page 6 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400IMS(IMX) NEAX2400 IMS (IPX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M

PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM IMG0

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM IMG1

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG2

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy/APM IMG3

IMG3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 7 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM CMG SP CMG

PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0~3)

Note:

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.


Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5)

CHAPTER 1 Page 8 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM IMG0/4/8/12 SP CMG

PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC43(EMA) PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 9 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM IMG1/5/9/13 SP CMG

PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PW14 (PWRSW) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PC20 (DLKC0) PH-PC20 (DLKC1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

TSWM0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 10 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PIM

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

CMP DUMMY ISWM

PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

IMG2/6/10/14

SP CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PW14 (PWRSW0) PH-PW14 (PWRSW1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK18 (CLK0) PH-CK18 (CLK1)

TSWM1

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 11 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PIM

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

CMP DUMMY ISWM

PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

IMG3/7/11/15

SP CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

Dummy

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5)

CHAPTER 1 Page 12 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)
LMG 4 (0~3)

PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)

HSW10 (PU-SW01) TSW13 (PU-SW00-A) TSW12 (PU-SW00-A) TSW11 (PU-SW00-A) TSW10 (PU-SW00-A) PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) IOGT1 (PH-GT10) IOGT0 (PH-GT10) PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) TSW03 (PU-SW00-A) TSW02 (PU-SW00-A) TSW01 (PU-SW00-A) TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)
PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI)

PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-ME44 (MEM) PZ-ME44 (MEM)

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PC23 (LANI)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

IMG0/4/8/12

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PC23 (LANI)

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5)
00 01 02 03 04
PH-PC43 (EMA)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

DUMMY

ISWM

CMG

CMP

SP

00 01 02 03 04

HSW01 (PU-SW01) HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES) PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

PH-PC43 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC) PH-IO24 (IOC) Note PH-M22 (MMC) PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

NEAX2400 IPX

CMG

PH-DK10 (DSPC)

DUMMY

FANU

ISWM

CMP

SP

Note:

NDA-24296

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LP

CHAPTER 1 Page 13 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM IMG0/4/8/12 SP CMG

PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC43(EMA) PH-M22(MMC)

LPM

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5)

CHAPTER 1 Page 14 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM CMP DUMMY ISWM IMG1/5/9/13 SP CMG

PIM PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

LMG 4 (0 3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1) PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW55-B (PWR0) PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PW14 (PWRSW) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PC20 (DLKC0) PH-PC20 (DLKC1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

TSWM0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 15 Revision 1.0

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PIM

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

CMP DUMMY ISWM

PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

IMG2/6/10/14

SP CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PW14 (PWRSW0) PH-PW14 (PWRSW1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-CK18 (CLK0) PH-CK18 (CLK1)

TSWM1

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 16 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

NEAX2400 IPX IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PIM

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM0 IMG1/5/9/13

PIM PIM PIM PIM TSWM1 IMG2/6/10/14

PIM PIM PIM PIM Dummy IMG3/7/11/15

CMP DUMMY ISWM

PIM PIM PIM LP IMG0/4/8/12

IMG3/7/11/15

SP CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1) PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW55-B(PWR0) PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

Dummy

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 1 Page 17 Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 1 Page 18 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2

CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card. General Function Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card. Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. Lamp Indications The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. Switch Settings Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of the explanation for each circuit card.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 19 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

SN1695 CPRBF-A
CPU Board
1. General Function The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZGT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: (c) FDD/HDD: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.
To I/O local bus

(d) PWR:

HDD FDD To HUB To HUB LANI LANI DSP CPU CPR#0 To MISC bus
Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR)

HDD DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPU CPR#1 FDD LANI LANI To HUB To HUB

CHAPTER 2 Page 20 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

The CPR in IPX-UMG system consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains System Processor Unit (SP)/Common Main Processor Unit (CMP)/Local Processor Unit (LP), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain PCI MEM (PZ-ME44), the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/ PZ-GT20/PZ-M565) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19/PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: (c) FDD/HDD: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. Note Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the SP/CMP/ LP.

(d) PWR:

Note:

FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 21 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-2. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are located in those busses respectively.

ISWM/PIM0 BSCM

LPM

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note CPR PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)


Note:

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.


Figure 2-2 CPR Location

CHAPTER 2 Page 22 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

When the SN1695 CPRBF-A is used in the IPX-UMG system, the CPR is mounted on each processor module (SP, CMP, and LPs) as shown in Figure 2-3. As to the mounting location of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP, and other circuit cards within the CPR, refer to Figure 2-5.

LMG0 3 CMG
00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00010203 04 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CMPCPR

LANI LANI ISAGT

LANI LANI ISAGT 00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23 0001020304

00 0102 03 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 0809 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

000102 0304 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 21 22 23

00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

00010203 04 0506 07 080910 1112 13 14 1516 1718 19 20 2122 23

SPCPR
0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

LANI LANI ISAGT

LANI LANI ISAGT

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 010203 04 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 1314 15 1617 18 19 20 21 22 23

LPCPR

Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 23 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

ISWM /Dummy /PIM0

SP/CMP /LP

CPR

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) /PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Note 1 PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI) Note 2

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Note 4 CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD) Note 3

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

Note 1: PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system or in IMG0/4/8/12 of IPX-UMG

system.
Note 2: The required LANI card and its mounting slot differs depending on each processor unit on which the

CPR is mounted within the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the explanation for PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23 card in this manual or Installation Manual.
Note 3: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG System. Note 4: PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) and PZ-M565 (ISAGT) cards are mounted on the CMP only. Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2 Page 24 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors. Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

[CPR for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]


PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224) Note
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON HDD

CPU OPE WDT IMG1 IMG2

IMG0 IMG3

5A 125V AC/DC OUTPWR

SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4

STATUS

SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM


ON 1 ON 13 20 12

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT2

CPURST

INPWR

ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Note:

This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.


Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 25 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

[CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System]


PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC23) LANI(PZ-PC19)
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON HDD

CPU OPE WDT IMG1 IMG2

IMG0 IMG3

5A 125V AC/DC OUTPWR

SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4

STATUS

SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM


ON 1 ON 13 20 12

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT2

CPURST

INPWR

ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

ISAGT (PZ-GT13)

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System

[CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System]


PWR(PZ-PW92) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC22)
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON

ISAGTA (PZ-M565)

CPU OPE WDT IMG1 IMG2

IMG0 IMG3

5A 125V AC/DC OUTPWR

SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4

STATUS

SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM


ON 1 ON 13 20 12

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT2

CPURST

INPWR

ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

MEM(PZ-ME44)

ISAGT (PZ-GT13)

Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System CHAPTER 2 Page 26 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

[CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System]


PWR(PZ-PW92) DSP(PZ-DK224) LANI(PZ-PC22)
PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT OFF
ON

ISAGT (PZ-GT20)

Note

CPU OPE WDT IMG1 IMG2

IMG0 IMG3

5A 125V AC/DC OUTPWR

SYSTEM SELECT0
ON 1 4

STATUS

SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM


ON 1 ON 13 20 12

SENSE

SYSTEM SELECT2

CPURST

INPWR

ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

ISAGT (PZ-GT13)

Note:

This card is required when IMG2/6/10/14 and/or IMG3/7/11/15 is configured.


Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 27 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in the IMG for 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system. [Lamp Indications for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note:

COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green Green

DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation. Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note

No lamp indication in STBY mode. The following shows lamp indications for the CPR in the ISW.

LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note:

COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green

DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state. Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

CHAPTER 2 Page 28 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

LAMP NAME

DESCRIPTION Two sets of 7-segment LED show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS SENSE LEFT RIGHT DESCRIPTION

1. When Program Install F c d The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute) Findicated during HD format. cindicated when copying data from FD to HD 1 d indicated while making the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load Not used 1 After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. 1 is indicated during this process. 3. On-line active CPR 0-9 0-9 S b y The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%) 4. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates S, b, y 5. Program & Office data load Not used 1
0

Not used

STATUS (DSP)

Not used

1indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory 0 indicated during the Office data load cindicated when copying the data from FD to HD dindicated while making the directory on the HD The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 1indicated during the Program load. 0indicated during the process. F indicated during HD format. The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. Hindicated during the ROM data loading.

3 4 5 6 C

Not used Not used Not used 1 Not used Not used

c d

F H

Note:

The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or E indicates the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Indication

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 29 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the SP, CMP, and LP for IPX-UMG system. [Lamp Indications for the CPR in SP]
LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) HDD (FDD/HDD) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) COLOR Green Red Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the SP is in active state. Remains OFF when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state. Not used. Not used. Not used.

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in CMP]


LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note: COLOR Green Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU of the CMP is in active state. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state. Lights green when the TSW1 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note Lights green when the TSW2 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note Lights green when the TSW3 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

CHAPTER 2 Page 30 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in LP]


LAMP NAME ON (PWR) ALM (PWR) WDT (DSP) CPU OPE (DSP) IMG0 (DSP) IMG1 (DSP) IMG2 (DSP) IMG3 (DSP) Note: COLOR Green Red Red Green Green Green Green Green DESCRIPTION Lights green when the PWR is supplied. Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation. Flashes green when IMG1/5/9/13 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG2/6/10/14 is mounted. Note Flashes green when IMG3/7/11/15 is mounted. Note

No lamp indication in STBY mode.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 31 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

LAMP NAME

DESCRIPTION Two sets of 7-segment LED show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.
STATUS SENSE LEFT RIGHT DESCRIPTION

0-9

0-9 S b y 0-F

1. On-line active CPR The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%) 2. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates S, b, y 3. Both active and stand-by CPR The setting of SENSE switch is indicated.

When the EMA SUP switch is OFF on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.

Not used 0 Not used

When the EMA SUP switch is ON on the PHPC43 (EMA) card.

STATUS (DSP)

Not used

4. Program & Office data load 1 indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory 0 indicated during the Office data load 1. When Program Install The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute) F indicated during HD format. c indicated when copying data from FD (Basic Software #1) to HD d indicated while making the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. 1 is indicated during this process. c indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

Not used 1

F c d

Not used

3 5

Not used Not used 1

c
0

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 1 indicated during the Program load. 0 indicated during the process. The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. H indicated during the ROM data loading.

Not used

Note:

The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates E meaning the processing failed.
Segment Spinning Ind

CHAPTER 2 Page 32 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

5.

Switch Settings [for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]


SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB Note (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) CPURST (DSP)

SETTING ON OFF ON (Up) OFF (Down) ON (Up) OFF (Down)

MEANING PWR is supplied to the CPR. PWR is not supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located.

Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting.

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Not used. Not used. Not used. Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF. Fixed to OFF. IPX-U System 1IMG/4IMG System Not used.

SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP)

2 3 4

2 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP)

4 5~7 8 SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) Note:

1~8

Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 33 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

SWITCH NAME

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING HD formatted

MEANING The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

File copied from FDD to HD Directory created on the HD

SENSE (DSP) Note

2 3 4 5 6 C

On-line mode. File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD. Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD. OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. HD format of the FDD/HDD. The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

Note:

The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

CHAPTER 2 Page 34 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

[for IPX-UMG System]


SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB Note (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) CPURST (DSP) SWITC H NO. SETTING ON OFF ON (Up) OFF (Down) ON (Up) OFF (Down) 1 2 SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) ON OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON STANDARD SETTING MEANING PWR is supplied to the CPR. PWR is not supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD. Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located. Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting. Fixed to ON. Fixed to OFF. High Density system configuration (one LP controls two IMGs) Standard system configuration (one LP controls four IMGs) Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON. PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF. Fixed to OFF. Fixed to ON.

2 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP)

4 5~7 8 Note:

Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed. This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 35 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1~4

SETTING OFF

STANDARD SETTING Not used.

MEANING

Physical PBI Number (Equipment Number)


SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PBI No.

SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP)

5~8

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

PBI 02 (SP) PBI 04 (CMP) PBI 30 (LP 00) PBI 38 (LP 04) Note PBI 40 (LP 08) PBI 48 (LP 12) Note PBI 50 (LP 16) PBI 58 (LP 20) Note PBI 60 (LP 24) PBI 68 (LP 28) Note

Note 1: Physical PBI No. must be the same

on the CPR of system #0 and #1 in dual configuration.


Note 2: This setting is required when the

system applies High Density system configuration (i.e., a LP controls two IMGs) only.
Note:

This switch setting is valid when the EMA SUP switch is ON (UP side).

CHAPTER 2 Page 36 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board Note:

Refer to the following figure and table for the PBI Number and the Equipment Number for IPX-UMG system. The same PBI Number must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual configuration.

IMG0 CMG CMP

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

SP

LP00 IMG4 IMG5 IMG6 IMG7

LP08 IMG8 IMG9 IMG10 IMG11

LP16 IMG12 IMG13 IMG14 IMG15

LP24

Processor Name SP CMP LP00 (IMG0) LP08 (IMG4) LP16 (IMG8) LP24 (IMG12)

PBI No. 02 04 30 40 50 60

CPU Accommodation

Equipment No. 15 14 0 2 4 6

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 37 Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

SWITCH NAME

SETTING 0 Note 2 1 Note 2

STANDARD SETTING On-line mode.

MEANING

The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD. 3 Note 2 5 Note 2 C Note 2 HD formatted File copied from FDD to HD Directory created on the HD

SENSE (DSP) Note 1

File copied from FDD to HD/Connection Hold Restart. Note 3 OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

Note 1: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.
Note 2: This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only. Note 3: Connection Hold Restart is proceeded by initializing the system with the TOPU key.

CHAPTER 2 Page 38 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

SN1695 CPRBF-A CPU Board

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SW (PWR) MB (PWR:PZ-PW106) MB (FDD/HDD) MBR (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) SENSE (DSP)

SWITCH SHAPE
ON OFF ON

REMARKS

ON

ON

1234

ON

12345678

ON

12345678

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 39 Revision 1.0

PH-GT09 Gate

PH-GT09
Gate
1. General Function The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.

PLO1 PLO0 TDSW13 TDSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TDSW02 TDSW11 TDSW01 TDSW10 TDSW00 MISC Bus DLKC0 MISC GT GT DLKC1 TDSW12 TDSW I/O Local Bus

DSP

DSP

To HUB

LANI

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To HUB

CPR #0 To HUB LANI MISC Bus

CPR #1 LANI MISC Bus To HUB

EMA

IOC/ MISC

Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System

CHAPTER 2 Page 40 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-GT09 Gate

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
GT1 GT0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-10.

OPE/MB

MB MBR

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 41 Revision 1.0

PH-GT09 Gate

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE/MB

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Make-busy of circuit card Normal setting

MEANING

MBR Note

When the ACT side of GTs MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When the TSW is dual configuration.) Normal setting.

Note:

Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

6.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

REMARKS

MBR

ON

CHAPTER 2 Page 42 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-GT10 Input Output Gate

PH-GT10
Input Output Gate
1. General Function The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface allowing the CPU board to control the TSW, HSW, and PLO cards in the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also is equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/ dual). This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES (IOGT0) PH-GT10 (IOGT1) PH-GT10 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS

LPM LANI

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 43 Revision 1.0

PH-GT10 Input Output Gate

ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES (IOGT0) PH-GT10 (IOGT1) PH-GT10 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS P-BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT


MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS MMC MISC EMA


MISC I/O BUS

CMP LANI P-BUS

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI BUS

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2 Page 44 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-GT10 Input Output Gate

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.

OPE/MB

MB MBR
PWRALM CA4L COPY

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 45 Revision 1.0

PH-GT10 Input Output Gate

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR Green

MEANING Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. This circuit card is in ST-BY state. Lights when this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when 4 MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty. Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.

OPE/MB

OFF Red

PWRALM CA4L COPY

Red Red Green

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit Card Make-busy

MEANING

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel Make-busy request Make-busy request cancel

MBR

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

MBR

ON

CHAPTER 2 Page 46 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer

PA-PC94
Data Link Multiplexer
1. General Function This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this processing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL management even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM of any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration. For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the Feature Programming Manual. Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2] Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9] This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of LN0/LMG0. IPX-U System/IPX-UMG System
LN 0/LMG0
(DLMX 1)
OUT

(TSW 1)
TSW 0

ISW/CMG
TSW/HSW 1 TSW/HSW 0

LN 1/LMG1
(TSW 1)
TSW 0

ATI

DLMX 0 Note
IN
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0 ATI

(TSW 1)
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0
TSW 0

LN 2/LMG2

ATI

(DLKC 1) DLKC 0

: Circuit Card : Circuit Card (No. 1 System) : BLF/TGBL data from DLKC : BLF/TGBL data to ATI
ATI

(TSW 1)
TSW 0

LN 3/LMG3

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC (No. 1 system) : BLF/TGBL data to ATI (No. 1 system) BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp
(DLKC 1) DLKC 0

Note:

IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW/CMG. OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW/ CMG.
Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 47 Revision 1.0

PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition When this circuit card is used in a single configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLMX
Highway Block HW 0

DLMX
HW 1

DLMX
HW 2

DLMX
HW 6

DLMX
HW 7

DLMX
HW 8

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To used this card, be sure to assign RT=938 on the ATRK command. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a DLMX card is mounted). 5. Only one DLMX card can be mounted when the system is composed of single configuration.

When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLMX #0
Highway Block

HW 0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

HW 1

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

HW 2

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

HW 6

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

HW 7

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

HW 8

DLMX #1

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW). This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23). This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To use this card, be sure to assign RT=938 on the ATRK command. A maximum two DLMX cards (a pair of DLMX card) can be mounted when the system is a dual configuration.

CHAPTER 2 Page 48 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer

3.

Face Layout of Lamps and Switches The face layout of lamps and switches is shown below.

OPE MB KEY

ACT LOAD PWALM MNT

MODE

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:
PA-PC94 Lamp Indications Reference

LAMP NAME OPE ACT LOAD PWALM

COLOR Green Green OFF OFF Red

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Lights when this circuit card is in a active state. Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state. Not used. Lights when OBP alarm

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 49 Revision 1.0

PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH No.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make-busy. Circuit card make-busy cancel

0 1 MNT 2 3 0 1-7

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Make-busy-request. Cancel the make-busy-request.

MODE

Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection) Not used.

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

ON

MNT

3 2 1 0

MODE

CHAPTER 2 Page 50 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A Dual Power

PA-PW54-A
Dual Power
1. General Function The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The 48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW55-A (PWR)

PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL SUB PWR HOW (For LC)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW REL SUB PWR

NFB

NFB

-48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)

-48 V +80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 51 Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A Dual Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
(PA-PW54-A) DPWR

PIM

CHAPTER 2 Page 52 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A Dual Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.

PAPW54 -A

-48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC

SW4 -48V SW

5.0 A

FUSE FUSE
0.5 A

MB RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V

RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC 25A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card

NDA-24296

) U P

CHAPTER 2 Page 53 Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A Dual Power

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME +80V ON 48 V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPUALM DCALM RGUALM HOWALM

COLOR Green Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red

STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights when RGU voltage alarm. Lights when howler alarm.

5.

Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH NAME 48V SW

SWITCH No.

SETTING ON OFF PUSH ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION 48 V input power is supplied. 48 V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.

RESET

Normal setting. Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting. Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

MB

1 SW4 2

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 54 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-A Dual Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

1 ON
SW4

2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 55 Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B Dual Power

PA-PW54-B
Dual Power
1. General Function The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW55-B (PWR)

PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR

DC-DC

RGU

HOW REL SUB PWR

NFB

NFB

-48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)

-48 V +80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System

CHAPTER 2 Page 56 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW54-B Dual Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DPWR (PA-PW54-B)

PIM

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 57 Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B Dual Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19.

PAPW54 -B

-48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC

SW4

-48V SW

5.0 A

FUSE FUSE
0.5 A

MB RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V

RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC

+80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 58 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

20A

SIDE VIEW

) U P

PA-PW54-B Dual Power

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME +80V ON 48 V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPUALM DCALM RGUALM HOWALM

COLOR Green Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red

STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. Lights in the case of howler alarm.

5.

Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH NAME 48V SW

SWITCH No.

SETTING ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION 48V input power is supplied. 48V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.

RESET

PUSH

Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

MB

ON OFF ON

1 SW4 2

OFF ON OFF

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 59 Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B Dual Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

1 ON
SW4

2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 Page 60 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-A Power

PA-PW55-A
Power
1. General Function The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW55-A (PWR)

PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR

DC-DC

RGU

HOW REL SUB PWR

NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)

NFB

-48 V +80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 61 Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR (PA-PW55-A) NDA-24296

PIM

CHAPTER 2 Page 62 Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

PAPW55 -A

-48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC

SW4 -48V SW

5.0 A

FUSE FUSE
0.5 A

MB RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V

RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC 25A

SIDE VIEW

+80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card

NDA-24296

U P

CHAPTER 2 Page 63 Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A Power

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME +80V ON 48 V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPUALM DCALM RGUALM HOWALM

COLOR Green Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red

STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights when RGU voltage alarm. Lights when howler alarm.

5.

Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH NAME 48 V SW

SWITCH No.

SETTING ON OFF PUSH

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION 48 V input power is supplied. 48 V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.

RESET

Normal setting Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

MB

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

1 SW4 2

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 64 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-A Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

1 ON
SW4

2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 65 Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B Power

PA-PW55-B
Power
1. General Function The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

PA-PW55-B (PWR)

PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU CR (For LC) HOW REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR

DC-DC

RGU

HOW REL SUB PWR

NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL)

NFB

-48 V +80V (Option) Note

Note:

The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .
Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System

CHAPTER 2 Page 66 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-PW55-B Power

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR (PA-PW55-B) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 67 Revision 1.0

PIM

PA-PW55-B Power

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23.

PAPW55 -B

-48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC

SW4

-48V SW

5.0 A

FUSE FUSE
0.5 A

MB RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V

RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC

+80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 68 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

20A

SIDE VIEW

) U P

PA-PW55-B Power

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME +80V ON 48 V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPUALM DCALM RGUALM HOWALM

COLOR Green Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red

STATE Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while 48 V input power is being supplied. Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and 5 V are being output normally. Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or 5 V outputs alarm. Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. Lights in the case of howler alarm.

5.

Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches.

SWITCH NAME 48V SW

SWITCH No.

SETTING ON OFF PUSH

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION 48V input power is supplied. 48V input power is not supplied. Hardware reset of the circuit card.

RESET ON MB OFF ON 1 OFF SW4 2 OFF ON

Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz] Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 69 Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B Power

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

48 V

RESET

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

1 ON
SW4

2
20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 Page 70 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

PH-DK10
Display Panel Controller
1. General Function The main functions of the PH-DK10 card are as follows: (a) to send out the system operating status, alarm and clock information to the Display Panel. (b) to collect the MJ/MN/SUP alarm information occurs on CMG and each LMG. In addition, by the collected internal alarm information, this card controls the Audible and Visual Alarm Indicating Panel. (c) to collect the key information on the TOPU of CMG, then output it to EMA. (d) to send out the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal from this card on the CMG to each LP. Additionally, this card activates the communication between the processor in each LP and CMP, SP. This circuit card is used in the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the next page for the location of this circuit card within the system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 71 Revision 1.0

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

CMG PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) ISEL LMG CMP PH-M22 PH-M22 PH-PC43 RECEIVER RECEIVER RELAY SP PH-DK10 PH-PC43 RECEIVER AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL PH-M22 SEL EMA RECEIVER PH-PC43 LMG RELAY DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) PH-PC43

EMA

EMA

RELAY

EMA

RELAY

KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION


Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC)

CHAPTER 2 Page 72 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04
DSPC

SP

CPRAS-A

CPRAS-A

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-25.

OPE/MB

MB CN8 CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0 To MMC on LPR (CMP/LP)

KEY

To PZ-DK222 on the TOPU of CMG

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 73 Revision 1.0

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE/MB

COLOR Green Red

STATE Lights when this circuit card is in operation. Lights when this circuit card is in Make Busy state.

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit Card Make-busy

MEANING

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

CHAPTER 2 Page 74 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

6.

External Interface

DSPC (PH-DK10) : Slot No.00

Connected to DSPP SP MISC0A Connector (BASEU) RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU 68PH DSPALM CA MDF

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL MJ MN BELL

Installation Cable

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) 68PH DSPALM CA and Installation Cable MDF 6-BELL


BELL MNA SUPA MJA

68PH DSPALM CA 68PH Connector Champ Connector


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MPALM SUPA1 EXTA MNA1 BELL0 MJA1 MNA0 SUPA0 MJA0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 MPALM

SUPB1 MNB1 BELL1 MJB1 MNB0 SUPB0 MJB0

8-MNA 9-SUPA 10-MJA 33-MNB 34-SUPB 35-MJB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) MJ/MN/BELL

MNB SUPB MJB

Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 75 Revision 1.0

PH-DK10 Display Panel Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

CHAPTER 2 Page 76 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller

PH-IO24
Input/Output Controller
1. General Function The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C, between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System (PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is in dual configuration.
Note:

Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

CPU BOARD #0 I/O GT #0

CPU BOARD GT #1 #1 I/O

MISC EMA FDD/HDD #0 MISC/IOC MISC I/O BUS FDD/HDD #1

IOC

(RS-232C) x4 posts for MAT, SMDR, MCI, PMS, PRT

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 77 Revision 1.0

PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The IOC cards can be placed in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.

Note:

Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

Mounting Module

LPM

00 01 02 03 04
IOC#1 IOC#0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-28.

OPE MB MBR IOC ALM

PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 SW50

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 78 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller

4.

Lamp Indications The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.

LAMP NAME OPE/MB

COLOR Green Red

DESCRIPTION This circuit card is operating normally. This circuit card is placed in the Make-busy state. Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor. RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3)

IOC ALM PORT0 - PORT3 SDn RDn ERn DRn CDn

Red

Green Green Green Green Green

SD: RD: ER: DR: CD:

Send Data Receive Data Equipment Ready Data Ready Carrier Detect

5.

Switch Settings The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard setting, it is indicated with in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING Up Down Up Down

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION The circuit card is placed into Make-busy status. Cancellation of Make-busy. The circuit card is placed into Make-busy request status. Cancellation of Make-busy Request. This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1. This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.

MBR

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Not used (For Business System Only). Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only). Free Wheeling. Not used.

SW50

Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 79 Revision 1.0

PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller

6.

External Interface As illustrated in Figure 2-29, the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A cable is required to connect external equipment such as the MAT, SMDR, MCI, and PRT.

Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below. RS-232C cable (Note 2) MISC 3B/2B (Note 1) Backplane 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A
AMP

Circuit #0

To RS-232C Terminal

TYP0

PH-IO24 (IOC)
AMP

TYP1 TYP0

Circuit #1

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Circuit #2

TYP1

MISC 3A/2A (Note 1) Circuit #3

Note 1: The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below. Mounting Slot 02 #2, #3 #0, #1 03 #2, #3 MISC 3A Note 2: The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the connecting cables is explained in the Installation Procedure Manual. MISC 2A MISC 3B IOC Circuit Number #0, #1 MISC Connector MISC 2B

Pin 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

TYP0, 1 Connector Signal name Pin Signal name SD 26 RD 27 RS 28 CS 29 30 DR 31 SG 32 CD ER 33 34 PB/CI 35 RT ST1 36 37 ST2 38 39 40 41 42

TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation

Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)

CHAPTER 2 Page 80 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SWITCH NAME MB

MBR
ON 12 34

Meaning of SW50-1: ON: OFF: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card. This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.

SW50

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 81 Revision 1.0

PH-M22 MMC

PH-M22
MMC
1. General Function The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are as follows: to collect key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/the other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. (for IPX-U system) to collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU display. (for IPX-U system) to send out the key information to EMA within the same LMG (for IPX-UMG system) to collect the external MJ/MN alarm information output by EMA in each LMG (for IPX-UMG system)

This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.


LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) PZ-DK227 (TOP KEY) ISEL PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER

ISW

EMA

SEL

EMA RELAY

RELAY LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL

EMA

RELAY KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System CHAPTER 2 Page 82 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PH-M22 MMC

CMG PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) ISEL CMP PH-M22 PH-M22 PH-PC43 RECEIVER RECEIVER RELAY SP PH-DK10 PH-PC43 RECEIVER AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL PH-M22 SEL EMA RECEIVER PH-PC43 LMG RELAY DISPLAY PANEL (DSPP) PH-PC43

LMG

EMA

EMA

RELAY

EMA

RELAY

KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION


Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 83 Revision 1.0

PH-M22 MMC

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module

LPM/CMP/LP

00 01 02 03 04
MMC CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-32.

OPE

MB

CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0

KEY

Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)

CHAPTER 2 Page 84 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M22 MMC

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATE Lights when this circuit card is in operation.

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit Card Make-busy

MEANING

Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 85 Revision 1.0

PH-M22 MMC

6.

External Interface

MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL LPM MISC0A Connector (BASEU) RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU 68PH EXMISC CA MDF MJ MN BELL

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) 68PH EXMISC CA and Installation Cable MDF BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA MJ/MN/BELL

68PH EXMISC CA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

MPALM EXTAA BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA

MNBA SUPBA MJBA

MNBA SUPBA MJBA RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V)

Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel Note:

External connection for Alarm Indicator is not used in IPX-UMG system.

CHAPTER 2 Page 86 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M22 MMC

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS Note:

Normal operating mode is down.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 87 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

PH-M16
Line Test
1. General Function This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscribers line. The circuit card supports sending Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note:

A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/ automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.

TEL

LC TSW I N T

TEL

LC

PIM LPRA LTST


EXTENDED I/O BUS

TEST EQ

GT EXGT

CPU

EXTENDED I/O BUS

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System

CHAPTER 2 Page 88 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:

Note:

IPX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02. IPX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)
Mounting Module
00 01 PH-M16 PH-M16 02 PH-M16 03 04

LPM

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-35.

OPE/MB MB

SW0

CRIN

Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Note:

CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 89 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

4.

Lamp Indications
COLOR Green Red DESCRIPTION This circuit card is operating in normal mode. This circuit card is Make-busy.

LAMP NAME OPE/MB

5.

Switch Settings
SWITCH NO SETTING UP DOWN 1 ON ON ON OFF ON 4 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Circuit card Make-busy Circuit card Make-busy cancel Setting of a condition of DT detection (440Hz+350Hz) Setting of a condition of RBT detection (440Hz+480Hz) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67 msec.) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133 msec.) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control or E-wire loop-back) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control only)

SWITCH NAME MB

2
3

SW0 5

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER SW0

5 ON ON

6 OFF ON ON ON

7 OFF OFF ON ON

8 OFF OFF OFF ON

TIME 8 16 32 64

ON ON

CHAPTER 2 Page 90 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

6.

External Interface

MISC Connector Accommodation Circuit Card Backboard Connector

Connector Name Slot Number


00 01 PH-M16 PH-M16 02 PH-M16 03 04

LPM

LPM Backboard MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC CABLE

MISC CONNECTOR
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TE TELB LCB THOWB THOWS SE ATB OUTB TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TM TELA LCA THOWA ONHK TCR ATM ATA OUTA TA1

INB

INA

Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 91 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

PBX
TM TE OUTA OUTA INA INB TA1 TB1

MDP

LTST

TLT

E M RA RB TA TB A B

LC

Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram

7.

Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH SHAPE


ON (MB) OFF

SWITCH NAME
MB

REMARKS

ON

12 3456 78

SW0

CHAPTER 2 Page 92 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

PH-PC36
Multiplexer
1. General Function The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information.

MUX
PCM HW PM BUS

LC/TRK PM LC/TRK
PCM HW PM BUS

MUX

PM LC/TRK

MUX
PCM HW PM BUS

PM LC/TRK

TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX

PCM HW PM BUS

PM

Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 93 Revision 1.0

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

PCM HW MUX TDSW 13 TDSW 03 MUX MUX MUX PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW MUX TDSW 12 TDSW 02 CPR 1
ISAGT

Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 3 Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM

PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW

Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 2 Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM

MUX MUX MUX

GT 1

CPR 0
ISAGT

GT 0 TDSW 11 TDSW 01
DLKC 1 DLKC 0

MUX MUX MUX MUX

PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW

Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 1 Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM

MUX TDSW 10 TDSW 00 MUX MUX MUX

PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM
IMG 0

Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM

Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System

CHAPTER 2 Page 94 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

MUX00 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX03 LC/TRK LC/TRK

MUX10

MUX11

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX12

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX13

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK TSW00 TSW10 DLKC0 LN/LMG MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 DLKC1

LC/TRK

PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12

PLO 1

TSW03 TSW13

TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10

ISWM

TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13 PLO 0 PLO 1

Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 95 Revision 1.0

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

The PCM highway running is illustrated in Figure 2-40. There are sixteen 2 Mbps PCM highways (HW0 HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance, highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the Group number 0, 1, 2 and 3. Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the group numbers 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Group number 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM). All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway 16 highways = 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW circuit card across the 32.786 Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS). Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/ trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX. In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in Time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).
Slot number of the PIM U-A Group (G) number of the LENS 8 circuits of CFTs

00

01 PWR (24)

02

03 PWR (25)

04

05

06

07

08

09

10 15 14

11 19 18

12 23 22

13 MUX#0

14 MUX#1

15

16

17

18

19

20

21 15 14

22 19 18

23 23 22

11

11

1 0 27 26

HW0

3 2

5 4 29 28

HW1

HW6

HW7

7 6

9 8 31 30

HW2

10

10

HW3

13 12

13 12

21

17

HW4 HW8 27 HW9 29 HW10 31


HW11 HW12 HW13

17 16

HW5

21 20

HW14

0 26

16

20

28 HW15

30

Group 24 and 25 are used for the SPM

2 Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway

Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running

CHAPTER 2 Page 96 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3. For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.
Mounting Module PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MUX #0 MUX #1

PIM

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-41.

MUXACT MB SYNC RCLK ALM PMCLK ALM CFT OPE ON OFF 4 3 2 1 SW01

MUX

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 97 Revision 1.0

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME MUX ACT SYNC RCLK ALM

COLOR Green Green Red

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the MUX and TSW. Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred. Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred. 2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks) Frame Head signal 4 Mbps clock signals

PMCLK ALM

Red

CFT OPE

Green

Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid. 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid. Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.

ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SW01

2 3 4

Setting -Law in the CFT function block. Not used. Not used.

CHAPTER 2 Page 98 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

6.

External Interface For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-42.

PIM 3 MT24 TSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1

PIM 2 MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX #0

MUX #1

PIM 1

MT24 TSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1

PIM 0

TSW #0

TSW #1

Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 99 Revision 1.0

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-43. As seen in this illustration, the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the MUX### connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for more details.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 LPM IMG0

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 TSWM IMG1

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy/APM IMG2

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy IMG3

BWB of TSWM

Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW

CHAPTER 2 Page 100 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC36 Multiplexer

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

ON

SW01

12 34

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 101 Revision 1.0

PH-PC20 Data Link Controller

PH-PC20
Data Link Controller
1. General Function This circuit card simultaneously provides all Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-IMG system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, or the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.

TSW ATTCON ISAGT0 ISA BUS ISAGT1 ATTCON

CPU0 GT0 GT1

CPU1 Note

DLKC0

MISC I/O BUS

DLKC1

Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System Note:

MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the DLKC. Mounting Location/Conditions
Mounting Module TSWM

2.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
DLKC#0 DLKC#1

CHAPTER 2 Page 102 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC20 Data Link Controller

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-45.

OPE/MB MB PWR ALM

Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is abnormal. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.

OPE/MB PWR ALM

Red Red

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

6.

External Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 103 Revision 1.0

PH-PC20 Data Link Controller

No cable connections are required. 7. Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

CHAPTER 2 Page 104 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

PH-PC45
Emergency Alarm Controller
1. General Function The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold sending function, too.

I/O Local Bus

I/O Local Bus

CPR #0

CPR #1 DSP DSP

CPU

GT

GT

CPU

EMA

MISC Bus # 0

IOC

MISC Bus # 1

MISC

Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 105 Revision 1.0

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.

Mounting Module

LPM

00 01 02 03 04 PH-PC40 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC)

LPM

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-47.

OPE/MB

MB ACT1 CKERR1 ACT0 CKERR0 EMASUP EMASUP CPU SEL

SW65

NMI SEL SW73 SW92 SW70 SW A0

SW62

Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 106 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE/MB ACT1 CKERR 1 ACT0 CKERR 0 EMSUP

COLOR Green Red Green Red Green Red Green OFF

STATE Indicates the circuit card is operating normally. Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state. CPU #1 is in the ACT state. CPU #1 clock failure has occurred. CPU #0 is in the ACT state. CPU #0 clock failure has occurred. Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .) Enable to the CPU change-over.

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Make-busy of the circuit card. Normal setting. Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.

EMASUP DOWN UP CPUSEL MIDDLE DOWN UP NMISEL DOWN Note:

Normal setting. Forced activating the CPU #1.

Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note Forced activating the CPU #0. Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.

Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.

Set CPUSEL switch downward, if a single CPU system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 107 Revision 1.0

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Power Shut Down (PSDN) function (used in Australia only)


SW62 ON OFF

2 OFF SW62 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF SW65 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF SW70 ON 2 OFF ON 1 OFF SW73 ON 2 OFF

SW62-1 SW62-2

IMG#0 valid IMG#1 valid IMG#2 valid IMG#3 valid

IMG0# invalid IMG1# invalid IMG2# invalid IMG3# invalid

SW62-3 SW62-4

Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration). CPU-ACT Signal does not output. Not used. Not used. Dual CPU configuration. Single CPU configuration. PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. External music on hold source (FM lead) is used. Internal music on hold source IC is used. Output the alarm information for the external indicator (used in Australia only). Alarm information does not output. Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid. PFT control is invalid. -law PCM CODEC is applied for the music. A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

CHAPTER 2 Page 108 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING
SW92-2

MEANING

SW92-1

Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF ON

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

2 SW92 Note 3

OFF

SW92-1

SW92-2

Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF ON

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

OFF

MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF. 1


SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF

OFF OFF OFF ON

OFF OFF ON OFF

Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime

ON Dont care

3 SWA0 Note

Dont care

ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF

Not used Not used

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card.

Not used Not used

Note:

SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 109 Revision 1.0

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

6.

External Interface External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-48.

EMA (Slot No.04)

EALM Connector Installation Cable AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL MDF MJ MN BELL RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU

LPM

16PH EXALM CA (BASEU)

REAR VIEW

01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0)

01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1)

CABLING DIAGRAM

16PH EXALM CA 26 E 1 2 27 E 28 3 4 29 MJB 30 MNA 5 31 6 7 32 33 8 34 9 50 EXTA 25

FM0 FM0 FM1 MPALM MJA MNA BELL E MJA MNA BELL MJB MNB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) EXTB CROSS CONNECTION

MDF

EXTERNAL MUSIC SOURCE MJ/MN/BELL

Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold

CHAPTER 2 Page 110 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PC45 Emergency Alarm Controller

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

EMA-SUP

ON

CPU-SEL

ON

NMI-SEL

ON

SWA0

12 34 56 78

ON

12 34

ON

SW62

12 34

ON

SW65

12

ON

SW70

12

ON

SW73

12 34

ON

SW92

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 111 Revision 1.0

PH-PW14 Power Switch

PH-PW14
Power Switch
1. General Function This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V to MISC slots. The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.

FUSE

PWR SW #0 FET Switch

PWR SW #1 FUSE

Load Controller -48V IN Switch DCDC DCDC Controller

Load

-48V

Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram

CHAPTER 2 Page 112 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-PW14 Power Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).
Mounting Module TSWM/ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PWR SW#1 PWR SW#0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-50.

P-ON ALM

SW

-48V in Fuse (125V AC/DC 15A)

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 113 Revision 1.0

PH-PW14 Power Switch

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME P-ON ALM

COLOR Green Red

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING The card supplies the operating power to various circuit cards.

ON SW OFF

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

00 01

ON

SW

-48 V operating power is supplied to various circuit cards.

CHAPTER 2 Page 114 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

PH-SW10
Time Division Switch
1. General Function This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT. The TSW capacity is 20482048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IPX configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.

[Connection diagram of the TSW]

MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK

MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK

MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK

TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX

PCM HW PM BUS

LC/TRK

[Function block diagram]

From EMA MUSIC

TSW INT D T G

LVDS

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

PLO

CFT

PH-SW10 DTI DCS

Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 115 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

Figure 2-52 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).
OSC#1 (PA-CK14)

DCS 1

PLO

TSW

TSW#1 (PH-SW10) DCS 0 DCS 0 DIU 0 DIU 1 DIU 2 DIU 3 DCS 1 PLO TSW

TSW#0 (PH-SW10) OSC#0 (PA-CK14) Multiple connection on MDF

Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram

When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required, and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (5 ppm deviation) can be the base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS0 2. DCS1 3. DIU0 4. DIU1 5. DIU2 6. DIU3 7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator

CHAPTER 2 Page 116 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH (for wireless module).

The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3. This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.) Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.
[Voice Prompt sending for Tone] Speech Path Memory TONE ROM Tone source selected by office data Tone [Voice Prompt sending for Music] Speech Path Memory MUSIC from EMA Music source selected by office data Music

[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory] [SPM for music channel 16-29] MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5 Note PIM 3

[SPM for music channel 0-15] MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM 2

[SPM for Tone channel 16-31] MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM 1

[SPM for Tone channel 0-15] MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 PIM0

Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.


Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 117 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in PIM number zero (0) of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW #0 TSW #1

PIM0

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-54.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TSWACT MUXACT PLOACT MB TSWMBR

SW11

SW12
M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY CFT

PLOMB

PMCA PMJ PMN

SYNC ICK ECK SW03

SW04

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)

CHAPTER 2 Page 118 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state. Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state. Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established. Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred. Lights when the CFT circuit is valid. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office 32.768 MHz output clock failure 8 KHz output FH failure 5 msec n output FH failure Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Both internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm) failure High-precision clock signals (0.3 ppm) failure

TSWACT

Red Off

MUXACT PLOACT M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PMCA CFT

Green Green Green Green Green Green Red Green

PMJ

Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: PMN Yellow

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 119 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch LAMP NAME COLOR Green SYNC STATE Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when any of the following have occurred. OFF DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure

Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally. ICK Green Note 1: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is operational. Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card (PA-CK14). Note 2: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.

ECK

Green

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. TSW Make-busy request.

TSWMBR DOWN UP PLOMBR DOWN SW12 1-F

TSW Make-busy request cancel. PLO Make-busy request.

PLO Make-busy request cancel. Fixed to 1.

CHAPTER 2 Page 120 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid. 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid. Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.

2 OFF SW03 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW04 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note:

Setting of -law in the CFT function block. Fixed. Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM 1/2/3). Note

TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in PIM 0). DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.

1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0

1.5 M clock for DIU 1 2 M clock for DIU 1

1.5 M clock for DIU 2 2 M clock for DIU 2

1.5 M clock for DIU 3 2 M clock for DIU 3

When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a connection to TSW (Dont use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED is not lit. In this mode, only SW03 is valid.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 121 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW11 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF 8 OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FE) (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FF) Not used 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. PLO operates as the clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON

MEANING PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.

CHAPTER 2 Page 122 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

6.

External Interface When this circuit card is used in clock subordinate office, clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be extracted. See Figure 2-56 for more information. When this circuit card is used in clock source office, cable connections are not necessary.

Mounting Module

PIM

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

DCSB0 DIU0B0 DIU1B0 DIU2B0 DIU3B0 SYN0B0 SYN1B0

DCSB1 DIU0B1 DIU1B1 DIU2B1 DIU3B1 SYN0B1 SYN1B1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

DCSA0 DIU0A0 DIU1A0 DIU2A0 DIU3A0 SYN0A0 SYN1A0

DCSA1 DIU0A1 DIU1A1 DIU2A1 DIU3A1 SYN0A1 SYN1A1

Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 123 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

PBX

MDF

CCT/DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT/DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT/DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT/DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

TSW #0

DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0

DCS

TSW #1

DCSA1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note:

The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).
Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 2 Page 124 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-57.

PIM 3 MT24 TSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1

PIM 2 MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX #0

MUX #1

PIM 1

MT24 TSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1

PIM 0

TSW #0

TSW #1

Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 125 Revision 1.0

PH-SW10 Time Division Switch

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

TSWMBR

ON

PLOMB

ON

12 34

ON

SW03

12 34 5 678

ON

SW04

12 34 5 678

ON

SW11

SW12

CHAPTER 2 Page 126 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

PH-SW12
Time Division Switch
1. General Function This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW card is capable of 8192 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards allow 8192 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administers the Port Microprocessor (PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.
[TSW configuration]
IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

TSW (8Kx2K)

IMG0

TSW (8Kx2K)

IMG1

TSW (8Kx2K)

IMG2

TSW (8Kx2K)

IMG3

[INT configuration]
ACT CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 GT1 I/O BUS TSW1 (INT) MUX00 System #1 System #0 MUX31 ISA BUS CPU0(LP) ISAGT0 I/O BUS GT0 STBY ACT TSW0 (INT) MUX30 ACT PM BUS LC/TRK(PM) STBY ACT STBY MUX01 PM BUS LC/TRK(PM) STBY

ISA BUS

Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 127 Revision 1.0

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card. Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.

FM MUSIC ROM

SEL

PLO#1 FM MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone TDSW00 Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone SEL

Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion

CHAPTER 2 Page 128 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

[SPM for music channel 16-29] MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5 Note [SPM for music channel 0-15] MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 16-31] MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 0-15] MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 PIM0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3

Note :

MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.
Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IPX-U system accommodates two TSWMs (TSWM0/1).
Mounting Module TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 10 TSW 11 TSW 12 TSW 13

TSWM

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 129 Revision 1.0

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

The definitions for the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below. 4-IMG System
SYMBOL TSW00 TSW01 0 TSW02 TSW03 TSW10 TSW11 1 TSW12 TSW13 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 0 IMG 1 SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG IMG 0 IMG 1

IPX-U system This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U system. For the card in TSWM0
SYMBOL TSW00 Collects the PCM data TSW01 0 TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW03 TSW10 Collects the PCM data TSW11 1 TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW13 IMG 1 IMG 0 IMG 1 IMG 1 IMG 0 IMG 0 IMG 1 SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG IMG 0

CHAPTER 2 Page 130 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

For the card in TSWM1


SYMBOL TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 TSW10 TSW11 TSW12 TSW13 1 Sends the PCM data to the ISW 0 Sends the PCM data to the ISW SYSTEM FUNCTION Collects the PCM data CONTROLLED IMG IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3

Collects the PCM data

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-61.

TSWACT

MB TSWMBR
M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PLO 1 PLO 0

TONE

Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 131 Revision 1.0

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established. Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1. Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.

TSWACT

Red Off

M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PLO 1 PLO 0

Green Green Green Green Green Green

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. TSW Make-busy request.

TSWMBR DOWN SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 TONE 2

TSW Make-busy request cancel. STANDARD SETTING Fixed. (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FE.) (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is FF.)

SETTING OFF ON OFF

MEANING

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.

CHAPTER 2 Page 132 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-SW12 Time Division Switch

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

ON

TSWMBR

TONE

1 2

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 133 Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A
Time Division Switch
1. General Function The PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PUSW00/PU-SW00-A cards and two PU-SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS) switching for four (4) LNs/LMGs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW/CMG.
[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX00 MUX10 2M PCM HW x8 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 MUX12

2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK

MUX03 32M TSW Matrix HW

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

32M TSW Matrix HW

DLKC0 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 DLKC1

32M SERIAL HW x4

TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4

32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10

32M SERIAL HW x4

TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

64KHz Clock

PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock

32.768MHz Clock

PLO 1

64KHz Clock

Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

CHAPTER 2 Page 134 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

[INT Configuration] ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT0 IOGT1 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS

LPM LANI

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 135 Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

[INT Configuration] ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT0 IOGT1 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS P-BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT


MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS MMC MISC EMA


MISC I/O BUS

CMP LANI P-BUS

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI BUS

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2 Page 136 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.
Mounting Module ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
TSW (00) TSW (01) TSW (02) TSW (03) TSW (10) TSW (11) TSW (12) TSW (13)

3.

Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-64.

TSWACT TSW MB TSW MBR


PWPALM HCKALM LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 LN20 LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00
1 2 3 4

SWE5

Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 137 Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR Green TSWACT Red PWPALM HCKALM LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 LN20 LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00 Red Red Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Lights when the TDSW block is active.

STATE

Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG. Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

CHAPTER 2 Page 138 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A Time Division Switch

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME TSW MB

SETTING UP DOWN UP

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Circuit card Make-busy request.

TSW MBR DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING LN (Local Node)/LMG (Local Module Group) connection mode. MUX connection mode. Not used. Not used. Not used.

SWE5

2 3 4

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

TSW MB

ON

TSW MBR

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 139 Revision 1.0

PU-SW01 Highway Switch

PU-SW01
Highway Switch
1. General Function The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, supports the following functions. (a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the space division is composed with this circuit card. (b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.
[TSW Configuration]
32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX00 MUX10 2M PCM HW x8 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 MUX12

2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK

2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK

MUX03 32M TSW Matrix HW

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

32M TSW Matrix HW

DLKC0 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 TSW02 TSW12 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 DLKC1

32M SERIAL HW x4

TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4

32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10

32M SERIAL HW x4

TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

64KHz Clock

PLO 0

32.768MHz Clock

32.768MHz Clock

PLO 1

64KHz Clock

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW)

CHAPTER 2 Page 140 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW01 Highway Switch

[INT Configuration] ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT0 IOGT1 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS

LPM LANI

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 141 Revision 1.0

PU-SW01 Highway Switch

[INT Configuration] ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT0 IOGT1 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS P-BUS LANI LANI CPU ISAGT


MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS MMC MISC EMA


MISC I/O BUS

CMP LANI P-BUS

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

PCI BUS

PCI MEM

PCI MEM

PCI BUS

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System

CHAPTER 2 Page 142 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW01 Highway Switch

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots are the shaded parts shown below.
Mounting Module ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
HSW (00) HSW (01) HSW (10) HSW (11)

3.

Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-66.

HSWACT MB

PWRALM
CKALF CKALE CKALD CKALC CKALB CKALA CKAL9 CKAL8 CKAL7 CKAL6 CKAL5 CKAL4 CKAL3 CKAL2 CKAL1 CKAL0

Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 143 Revision 1.0

PU-SW01 Highway Switch

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME HSWACT

COLOR Green Red Lights when the HSW block is active.

STATE

Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state. Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

PWPALM CKALF

Red Green Off Green

CKALE Off Green CKALD Off Green CKALC Off Green CKALB Off Green CKALA Off Green CKAL9 Off Green CKAL8 Off Green CKAL7 Off Green CKAL6 Off Green CKAL5 Off Green CKAL4 Off

CHAPTER 2 Page 144 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PU-SW01 Highway Switch LAMP NAME CKAL3 Off Green CKAL2 Off Green CKAL1 Off Green CKAL0 Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM. COLOR Green STATE Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

6.

External Interface No cable connections are required.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 145 Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT13
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.
PLO1 PLO0 TSW13 TSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TSW02 TSW11 TSW01 TSW10 TSW00 TSW12 TDSW I/O Local Bus

MISC

DLKC0

DLKC1

GT

GT

DSP

DSP

To HUB

LANI

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To HUB

CPR #0 To HUB LANI MISC I/O Bus

CPR #1 LANI MISC I/O Bus To HUB

EMA

IOC/ MISC

Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CHAPTER 2 Page 146 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

ISWM RES HSW01 HSW00 TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES (IOGT0) PH-GT10 (IOGT1) PH-GT10 RES TSW I/O BUS RES HSW11 HSW10 TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

ISAGT BUS LANI LANI CPU (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 MISC IOC EMA MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUS

LPM LANI

(ISAGT) PZ-GT13

CPU

LANI

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW)

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-69.
Mounting Module

LPM
PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) PZ-DK224 (DSP)

Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 147 Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-70. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

PMG CONN

DSPP

A B

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

4.

External Interface This card has no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 148 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT16
Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.

TSW

TSW

I/O Local Bus

I/O Local Bus

DSP

DSP

To HUB

LANI

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

To HUB

To HUB

LANI CPR#0 CPR#1

LANI

To HUB

MISC Bus EMA

MISC Bus

IOC/ MISC

Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 149 Revision 1.0

PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-72.
Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT16 (GT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16

CHAPTER 2 Page 150 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-73. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

PMG CONN A B FRONT VIEW

DSPP

Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

4.

Lamp Indications This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.


NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 151 Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT20
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW, MUX cards of IMG2, 3/6, 7/10, 11/14, 15 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 CLK 1 TSW I/O BUS CLK 0

TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

TSW I/O BUS

PH-GT09 (IOGT0)

PH-GT09 (IOGT1) TSWM#1 (IMG2/6/10/14) TSW03 TSW02 TSW01 TSW00 PLO 1 PLO 0 MISC TSW13 TSW12 TSW11 TSW10

GT-BUS

PH-GT09 (IOGT0)

PH-GT09 GT-BUS (IOGT1) TSWM#0 (IMG1/5/9/13)

ISA BUS LANI LANI CPU#0

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

MMC EMA IOC/ MISC

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

ISA BUS LANI CPU#1 LANI

LPM (IMG0/4/8/12)

Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) CHAPTER 2 Page 152 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-75.
Mounting Module LP(IMG0/4/8/12)

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19/PC22 (LANI)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)

Note:

FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of LP in IPX-UMG system. Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-76. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.
ISA BUS INTERFACE

Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 153 Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

4.

External Interface This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 154 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-M565 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-M565
Industry Standard Architecture Gateway
1. General Function This circuit card has the relay functions as mentioned below: (a) to receive the NMI (Non-Maskable Interruption) signal from the PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card, then output it to ISA Bus. (b) to receive the ACT signal from the EMA card, then output it to PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card. This card is used in IPX-UMG system connecting the two cards on CPU#0 and #1 in CMP with a bus cable.

PCI BUS

PCI MEM ISA BUS PZ-M565 (ISAGT2) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) EMA MISC DSPC /MMC PZ-M565 (ISAGT2) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PCI MEM ISA BUS

PCI BUS

LANI LANI CPU#0 CPU#1

LANI LANI

CMP

Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-M565 (ISAGT) card is mounted in PCI Slot No.05 on CPU Board within the CMP of IPX-UMG system as shown in Figure 2-78.
CMP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V SW ON I -58.6 CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 O OFF 5A 125V AC/DC

IMG3

5.0 A

PALM

OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR

PZ-M565

PCI bus

ISA bus

Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 155 Revision 1.0

PZ-M565 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown below.

CONN

Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card

4.

Lamp Indications This card contains no lamps.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface See the NEAX 2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 156 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-ME44 PCI Memory

PZ-ME44
PCI Memory
1. General Function Mounted on CPU Board of CMP in IPX-UMG system, this circuit card provides the Memory Copy function related to ACT/ST-BY system changeover.
I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

CPR #0 PCI MEM


DSP DSP

CPR #1 PCI MEM

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

ISAGT2

ISAGT2

EMA MISC Bus #0 MISC DPSC /MMC MISC Bus #1

Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card is mounted in PCI Slot No. 02 on CPU Board of CMP as shown in Figure 2-81.
PZ-PW92
DC-40V SW ON I -58.6 CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 O OFF 5A 125V AC/DC

IMG3

5.0 A

PALM

OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-ME44
Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44 NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2 Page 157 Revision 1.0

PZ-ME44 PCI Memory

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors and lamps is shown in Figure 2-82.

COPY

SOFT

CONN

WE

Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COPY

COLOR Green OFF Green Copy mode Self mode

DESCRIPTION

Normally operating in copy mode (Valid when copy lamp lights) Remains OFF during ACT STBY memory copy Lights when Memory writing

SOFT OFF WE Green

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

6.

External Interface See the NEAX2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 158 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC19
Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).

To another Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

FCCH

HUB

HUB

10-BASE-T

DSP

DSP

LANI

CPU

ISAGT

ISAGT

CPU

LANI

LANI CPR #0 CPR #1

LANI

PCI 10-BASE-T

HUB

MAT
IMX

NIC

Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 159 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-84.

Mounting Module

LPM

PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-85.

PCI BUS INTERFACE

10 BASE-T

EST0 EST1 EST2 EST3

Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 160 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME EST0 EST1 EST2 EST3

COLOR Green Green Red Yellow Layer 1 link has established. Data packet sending/receiving. Layer 1 link failure.

DESCRIPTION

Data packet collision has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 161 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

FCH DTI

24DTR

HUB FCH CN2

10AL (10)FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable

PZ-PC19(LANI)

HUB

TO IMX MAT 10 BASE-T straight Cable 10 BASE-T straight Cable

Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 162 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC22 Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC22
Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function The PZ-PC22 (LANI) circuit card is a single port Ether card that builds up Fusion link or Ether LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus slot in the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus. This card is mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in the IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

FCCH

HUB 10BASE-T LP#0 LAN CPU LP#1 CPU

HUB 10BASE-T

LAN

CMP#0 LAN 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) HUB 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#0 LAN CPU

CMP#1 CPU LAN

100BASE-TX (P-BUS) 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#1 LAN

LAN 10BASE-T

CPU

CPU

LAN 10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT NIC

Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 163 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22 Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC22 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-88.

CMP-CPR/LP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V SW ON I -58.6 CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 O OFF 5A 125V AC/DC

IMG3

5.0 A

PALM

OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-PC22
Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-89.

LAN

100M TXRX LINK COL

Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 164 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC22 Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME 100M TXRX LINK COL

COLOR Green Green Green Yellow

DESCRIPTION 100MHz mode Data packet sending/receiving Link has been established. Data packet collision has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 165 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22 Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

HUB

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI)

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 166 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC23 Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC23
Local Area Network Interface
1. General Function The PZ-PC23 (LANI) circuit card is a multiple ports Ether card that builds up Fusion link or external Ether LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. In the IPX-UMG system, one connector is used for Ethernet, and the other for Fusion link. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus slot within the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus or Fusion link. This card is mounted on the CPR of SP in the IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

FCCH

HUB 10BASE-T LP#0 LAN CPU LP#1 CPU

HUB 10BASE-T

LAN

CMP#0 LAN 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) HUB 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#0 LAN CPU

CMP#1 CPU LAN

100BASE-TX (P-BUS) 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#1 LAN

LAN 10BASE-T

CPU

CPU

LAN 10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT NIC

Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 167 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23 Local Area Network Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC23 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as shown in Figure 2-92.

SP-CPR
PZ-PW92
DC-40V SW ON I -58.6 CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 O OFF 5A 125V AC/DC

IMG3

5.0 A

PALM

OUTPWR ON ALM INPWR

PCI bus

ISA bus

PZ-PC23
Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23

3.

Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-93.

Note
LAN0
100M0 LINK0 TXRX0 COL0

Note
LAN1
100M1 LINK1 TXRX1 COL1

Note:

Connect the Ether cable to LAN0 connector for Processor bus within the IPX-UMG system. When Fusion network is used, connect the Ether cable to LAN1 connector to establish Fusion link.
Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card

CHAPTER 2 Page 168 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PZ-PC23 Local Area Network Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME 100M0/1 LINK0/1 TXRX0/1 COL0/1

COLOR Green Green Green Yellow

DESCRIPTION 100MHz mode Link has been established. Data packet sending/receiving Data packet collision has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 2 Page 169 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23 Local Area Network Interface

6.

External Interface

HUB(PH-CM103)

FCH DTI

24DTR

HUB FCH CN2

10AL (10)FLT CA 10 BASE-T Straight Cable

PZ-PC19(LANI) PZ-PC23(LANI)

HUB

Connected to the MAT 10 BASE-T Straight Cable 10 BASE-T Straight Cable

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI)

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 2 Page 170 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3
1. GENERAL

LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards. General Function Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card. Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. Lamp Indications Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. Switch Settings Each circuit cards switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.

NDA-24296

Chapter 3 Page 171 Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

PA-CFTB
8-party Conference Trunk
1. General Function The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of a maximum of eight parties. A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time. The card adopts N-1 addition method for establishing a conference.
Note:

This circuit card is used for following features: Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [S-56]) Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-2]) Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-121]) Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)

This diagram shows an example of a Preset conference involving Tie Line connections.
INT Answer/Release Signal TLT NETWORK TLT SW INT CH 7 6 5 4 3 LC Conferee 2 1 0 LC Conference Originator PCM INT VPROC PA-CFTB

Local I/O Bus CPU GT PCM INT: PCM Interface VPROC: Voice Processor Block

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 172 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 173 Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2.

OPE N-OPE SW2 SW1 SW0 BL7 MB

BL0

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE BL0 BL7

COLOR
Green Red Red Flash

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy. BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.

CHAPTER 3 Page 174 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME
MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING
UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed in the system

SW0
12345678

ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 175 Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW 1
12345678

SWITCH NO.
1

SETTING
ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW2


12345678

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

Fixed in the system

ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 5 6 OFF OFF OFF

-law PCM encoder


A-law PCM encoder Conference connection is set up by PB tel. Conference connection is not set up by PB tel. When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114. When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP1141.

Not used Not used Not used

CHAPTER 3 Page 176 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW2

SWITCH NO.

SETTING
ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting

7 OFF

SW2-7
OFF OFF ON ON

SW2-8
OFF ON OFF ON

PAD [dB]
0 3 6 9

ON 8 OFF

6.

Switch Setting Sheet SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE


ON 12345678

MODULE
PIM

REMARKS

SW0

ON

12345678

SW1

ON

12345678

SW2

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 177 Revision 1.0

PA-CK14 Oscillator

PA-CK14
Oscillator
1. General Function The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (5 ppm deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clocksource-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DSC 0

DSC 1

BWB

BWB

DSC1 SEL OSC PLO PLO DSC0 SEL OSC

SEL

FRONT CABLES

SEL

FRONT CABLES

TDSW

TDSW

MUX0
BWB

MUX1

MUX2

MUX3

MUX0

MUX1

MUX2

MUX3
BWB

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 178 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CK14 Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in Port Interface Module number zero (PIM 0). The card mounted in slot number 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OSC#0 OSC#1

PIM0

Note:

This card occupies two slots. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-4.

3.

CLKOUT 0 CLKOUT 1 MB

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 179 Revision 1.0

PA-CK14 Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME CLKOUT0 CLKOUT1

COLOR Green Green

STATE Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0. Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Make-busy of the circuit card.

Normal setting.

6.

External Interface Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

CHAPTER 3 Page 180 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16
Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-5, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 DCS 1

MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB

SEL PLL OSC OSC

SEL PLL

PLO #0 BWB

PLO #1 BWB

TDSW00

TDSW01

TDSW02

TDSW03

TDSW10

TDSW11

TDSW12

TDSW13

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 181 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH

CHAPTER 3 Page 182 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source.

FM MUSIC ROM

SEL

PLO#1 FM MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone TDSW00 Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone SEL

Figure 3-6 Music Source

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 183 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.
Mounting Module TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PLO 0 PLO 1

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-7.

1 2 3 4

SW8F
ACT MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM

SWAC SWAB

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)

CHAPTER 3 Page 184 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME ACT

COLOR Green Off

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office 32.768 MHz output clock failure

MJ

Red

8 KHz output FH failure 5 msec n output FH failure Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred: DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal.

MN

Red

Green SYNC

OFF

ICK PALM

Green Red

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 185 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy. 1

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Fixed to 1.

SW03

1-F

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING Clock subordinate office. Clock source office.

MEANING

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. -law CODEC is used for the hold music. Not used.

4 OFF SW01 ON 5 OFF ON OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 186 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

MEANING DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.

4 SW02 5

1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 2 M clock for DIU 1 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 2 M clock for DIU 2 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 2 M clock for DIU 3 External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

SWAC

1 2

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. Not used.


Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

SW8F-1

SW8F-2

OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

2 SW8F 3

ON OFF

SW8F-3

SW8F-4

Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

ON OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 187 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING
SWA0-2 SWA0-3

SETTING

MEANING

SWA0-1

MUSIC

OFF ON

OFF OFF OFF ON

OFF OFF ON OFF

Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime

Note Note

3 SWAB 4 5 6 7 8

Note: ON OFF

Dont care.
Not used. Not used.

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. ON OFF Not used. Not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 188 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Mounting Module

TSWM
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

REAR VIEW

TSWM

EXCLK1 (Slot No.23)

EXCLK0 (Slot No.21)

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A

34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF

Installation Cable 34PH EXCLK CA-A

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Slot No.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO #0 PLO #1

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 189 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

PBX
POUT A POUT B

MDF

CCT /DTI /PRT

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

PLO #0

DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0

DCS

DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 190 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

REMARKS

1 234 56 78

ON

SW01

1 234 56 78

ON

SW02

SW03

SWAC

12

ON

SW8F

1 23 4

ON

1 234 56 78

ON

SWAB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 191 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With this circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-10, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

DCS1 (MDF)

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

PLO #1

OSC

64K+8K (BWB)

OSC

SEL PLL Drv


BWB

CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM

SEL PLL

(BWB)

Drv
BWB

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System

CHAPTER 3 Page 192 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

(MDF)

DCS1

ISWM OSC

PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)

PLO 1 OSC

SEL PLL Drv


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM

SEL PLL

(BWB)

Drv
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW00

TSW03

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

TSW10

TSW13

from LN/LMG DTI

from LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0 (IMG0/IMG1)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG0/IMG1) /(IMG12/IMG13)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 193 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <For 4-IMG System>
Mounting Module

TSWM(IMG1)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>

Mounting Module

ISWM
PLO (#1) PLO (#0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 Page 194 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-12.

OPE MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

SW11

SW12

SW01

SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 195 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office

MJ

Red

32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

MN

Red

SYNC ICK CKPKG Note ALM0 Note ALM1 Note PALM Note:

Green Green Green Red Red Red

This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy. 1

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Fixed to 1.

SW03

1-F

CHAPTER 3 Page 196 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of SW01 differs depending on the mounting location. [Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 Note: ON OFF OFF Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 Note 1 STANDARD SETTING Note 1 Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. -law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed to OFF (Not used). MEANING

When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 197 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]


SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW01 4 OFF ON 5 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Clock subordinate office. (Fixed) Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. (Fixed to ON) This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

ON OFF

7 8

ON OFF OFF

-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed OFF (Not used).

CHAPTER 3 Page 198 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

MEANING DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.

4 SW02 Note 2 5

1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 2 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. 2 M clock for DIU 3. External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

1 SW10 2 Note 3

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. CLK card is not used. CLK card is used.

Note 2: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISWM is used. The DTI

clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 3: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to ON (=CLK card is not used).

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG, set to OFF if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used. set to ON if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 199 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SW11-1

SW11-2

Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

2 SW11 3

OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

SW11-3

SW11-4

Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

1
SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC

OFF

OFF OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF OFF ON

Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime

ON Dont Care

3 SW12 ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF

Dont Care

Not used. Not used.

MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. Not used. Not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 200 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK0 EXCLK1

TSWM

PLO

PLO

TSW

LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Backplane

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

TSWM

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 201 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).
34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

TSWM

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A

REAR VIEW

MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23
EXCLK1 EXCLK0

ISWM

PLO

PLO

CHAPTER 3 Page 202 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Backplane
EXCLK1 EXCLK0

ISWM

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).

Rear View

ISWM

EXCLK1 (Slot No.13)

EXCLK0 (Slot No.09)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 203 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-15 shows an example of a system with the PLO cards in dual configuration.

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW/CMG

MDF

PCM Cable(IP) External High-Stability Oscillator #1 CLK

PLO#1 EXCLK1 ISWM PLO#0 EXCLK0

LT Connector Cable

DCSA DCSB

EXCLK1 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0

BASEU

External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator

CHAPTER 3 Page 204 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-16 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

LN/LMG
Digital Interface

LT Connector

MDF
Installation Cable RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB CLK DIU0A0 EXCLK0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 PCM Cable (2P) to other node

ISW/CMG

maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) Installation Cable

PCM Carrier Equipment DSU

PLO#0

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 205 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

ISWM CLK10 (Slot No.12) CLK00 (Slot No.08)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface

PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

LEAD NAME FM1 FM0

DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B

PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

LEAD NAME E E

DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A

Note:

For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-18.


Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CHAPTER 3 Page 206 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-18 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

IMG
LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable

MDF
RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B
PCM Cable (2P)

PCM Carrier Equipment DSU

to other node

maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG)

CLK

PLO#0 EXCLK0

Installation Cable

PLO#1 EXCLK1

DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0


Installation Cable

Note 1

DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 207 Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ISW-LN PLO CA-A/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25 P) MDF

Note

MUSIC SOURCE

Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF.

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.


Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

SW01

1 234 5 67 8

ON

SW02

1 234 5 67 8

ON

SW03

12

ON

SW10
ON

SW11

1 234

SW12

1 234 5 67 8

ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 208 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17
Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-20, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 DCS 1

MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB

SEL PLL OSC OSC

SEL PLL

PLO #0 BWB

PLO #1 BWB

TDSW00

TDSW01

TDSW02

TDSW03

TDSW10

TDSW11

TDSW12

TDSW13

Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 209 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH

CHAPTER 3 Page 210 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source.

FM MUSIC ROM

SEL

PLO#1 FM MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone TDSW00 Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone SEL

Figure 3-21 Music Source

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 211 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM
PLO 0 PLO 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-22.

ACT MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM

SW06 SW05 SW04


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW01

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)

CHAPTER 3 Page 212 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME ACT

COLOR Green Off

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office. 32.768 MHz output clock failure.

MJ

Red

8 KHz output FH failure. 5 msec n output FH failure. Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card). Internal OSC (0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office. Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed. Drifting failure. Internal OSC (0.3 ppm deviation) failure. Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred. DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. Drifting failure. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal.

MN

Red

Green SYNC

OFF

ICK PALM

Green Red

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 213 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy. 1

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Fixed to 1.

SW03

1-F

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING Clock subordinate office. Clock source office.

MEANING

Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. -law CODEC is used for the hold music. Not used.

4 OFF SW01 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 214 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

MEANING DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.

4 SW02 5

1.5 M clock for DIU 0 2 M clock for DIU 0 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 2 M clock for DIU 1 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 2 M clock for DIU 2 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 2 M clock for DIU 3 External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

SW05

1 2 1

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. Not used.

SW8F-1

SW8F-2

Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

2 SW06 3

OFF ON OFF
SW8F-3

OFF OFF ON
SW8F-4

600 8.2 47K


Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 215 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING

MEANING

SWA0-1

SWA0-2

SWA0-3

MUSIC

OFF ON Note Note

OFF OFF OFF ON

OFF OFF ON OFF

Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime

3 Note: SW04 4 5 6 7 8 ON OFF Not used. Not used. MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. ON OFF

Dont care.
Not used. Not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 216 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Mounting Module

TSWM
34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

REAR VIEW

TSWM

EXCLK1 (Slot No.23)

EXCLK0 (Slot No.21)

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A

34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF

Installation Cable 34PH EXCLK CA-A

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Slot No.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO #0 PLO #1

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 217 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

PBX
POUT A POUT B

MDF

CCT /DTI /PRT

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

CCT /DTI /PRT

POUT A POUT B

PLO #0

DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0

DCS

DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 218 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

REMARKS

123 4 56 78

ON

SW01

12 34 567 8

ON

SW02

SW03

SW05

12

ON

SW06

1 234

ON

1 23 4 56 78

ON

SW04

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 219 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17-A
Phase Lock Oscillator
1. General Function This circuit card used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization between networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing this circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-25, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

DCS1 (MDF)

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

PLO #1

OSC

64K+8K (BWB)

OSC

SEL PLL Drv


BWB

CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM

SEL PLL

(BWB)

Drv
BWB

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System

CHAPTER 3 Page 220 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

DTI0 1 2 3

DCS0

(MDF)

DCS1

ISWM OSC

PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)

PLO 1 OSC

SEL PLL Drv


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM

SEL PLL Drv


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

(BWB)

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW00

TSW03

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

TSW10

TSW13

from LN/LMG DTI

from LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0 (IMG0/IMG1)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG0/IMG1) /(IMG12/IMG13)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 221 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. <For 4-IMG System>
Mounting Module

TSWM(IMG1)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1)

<For IPX-U/IPX-UMG System>

Mounting Module

ISWM
PLO (#1) PLO (#0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)
PLO (#0) PLO (#1)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 Page 222 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-27:

OPE MB
MJ MN SYNC ICK CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

SW11

SW12

SW01

SW10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2

SW02

SW03

Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 223 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office

MJ

Red

32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

MN

Red

One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed Drifting failure Internal OSC (5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC ICK CKPKG Note ALM0 Note ALM1 Note PALM Note:

Green Green Green Red Red Red

Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 224 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy. 1

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Fixed to 1.

SW03

1-F

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 225 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of SW01 differs depending on the mounting location. [Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 Note 2 STANDARD SETTING Note 2 Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. Note 2 This circuit card is not used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. -law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. Fixed to OFF (Not used). MEANING

ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF

Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS

or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.


Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

CHAPTER 3 Page 226 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]


SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SETTING ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW01 OFF ON 5 OFF STANDARD SETTING MEANING Clock subordinate office. (Fixed) Clock source office. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.) Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. (In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.) 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card. (Fixed to ON ) This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

ON 6 OFF 7 8 ON OFF OFF

-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold. Fixed OFF (Not used).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 227 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

MEANING DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. DIU 0 is not used. DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. DIU 1 is not used. DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. DIU 2 is not used. DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. DIU 3 is not used.

4 SW02 Note 1 5

1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 2 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. 2 M clock for DIU 3. External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

1 SW10 2 Note 2

MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. CLK card is not used. CLK card is used.

Note 1: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, DCS clock from the ISWM is used.

The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.
Note 2: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to ON (=CLK card is not used).

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG, set to OFF if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used. set to ON if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 228 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING
SW11-2

MEANING

SW11-1

Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

2 SW11 3

OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON

600 8.2 47K


Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

SW11-3

SW11-4

4 1 2 3

OFF ON OFF
SW12-1

OFF OFF ON
SW12-2 SW12-3

600 8.2 47K


MUSIC

OFF ON Dont Care Dont Care

OFF OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF OFF ON

Fr Elise Maidens prayer Buzzer Chime

ON 4 SW12 5 6 7 ON 8 OFF OFF

Not used. Not used.

MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. Not used. Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 229 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

6.

External Interface PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1

PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK0 EXCLK1

TSWM

PLO

PLO

TSW

LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Backplane

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

TSWM

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 230 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

TSWM

EXCLK1

EXCLK0

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A

REAR VIEW

MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.
Front View

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
EXCLK1 EXCLK0

ISWM

PLO

PLO

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 231 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Backplane
EXCLK1 EXCLK0

ISWM

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) DIU3xx (low).

Rear View

ISWM

EXCLK1 (Slot No.13)

EXCLK0 (Slot No.09)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 232 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-30 shows an example of a system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration.

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW/CMG

MDF

PCM Cable(IP) External High-Stability Oscillator #1 CLK

PLO#1 EXCLK1 ISWM PLO#0 EXCLK0

LT Connector Cable

DCSA DCSB

EXCLK1 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0

BASEU

External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK

Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 233 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

LN/LMG
Digital Interface

LT Connector

MDF
Installation Cable RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB PCM Cable (2P) to other node

ISW/CMG

maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) Installation Cable

PCM Carrier Equipment DSU


CLK

PLO#0 EXCLK0

DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

CHAPTER 3 Page 234 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

ISWM CLK10 (Slot No.12) CLK00 (Slot No.08)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface

PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

LEAD NAME FM1 FM0

DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B

PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LEAD NAME E E

DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A

Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.

Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 235 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-33 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG system.)
maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

IMG
LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable

MDF
RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B
PCM Cable (2P)

PCM Carrier Equipment DSU

to other node

maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG)

CLK

PLO#0 EXCLK0

Installation Cable

PLO#1 EXCLK1

DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0


Installation Cable

Note 1

DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1

Note 2

Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

CHAPTER 3 Page 236 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ISW-LN PLO CA-A / 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25P) MDF

Note

MUSIC SOURCE

Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF.

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.


Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 237 Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

SW01

12 34 56 78

ON

SW02

12 34 56 78

ON

SW03

12

ON

SW10
ON

SW11

12 34

SW12

1 234 5 67 8

ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 238 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK18 Clock

PH-CK18
Clock
1. General Function This circuit card is used for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system or used for the Local Module Group (LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals to the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 of IMG1/5/9/13, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 of IMG2/6/10/14. 32.768 MHz CLK 8 KHz FH 5 msec n FH (for Wireless System)
DTI0 1 2 3 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1

ISW OSC

PLO 0 64K+8K (BWB)

PLO 1 OSC

SEL PLL Drv


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

CL K, FH, W F H A C T, A LM

SEL PLL Drv


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB)

(BWB)

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW00

TSW03

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable)

TSW10

TSW13

from LN/LMG DTI

from LN/LMG DTI

LN0/LMG0 (IMG0/IMG1)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

PLO 0 (TSWM0)

PLO 1 (TSWM0)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG0/IMG1) /(IMG12/IMG13)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0 (IMG2/IMG3)
32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

CLK0 (TSWM1)

CLK1 (TSWM1)

LN3/LMG3 (IMG2/IMG3) /(IMG14/IMG15)


32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

TSW 00~03

TSW 10~13

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

MUX (System0)

MUX (System1)

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 239 Revision 1.0

PH-CK18 Clock

2.

Mounting Location/Condition Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module

TSWM1(IMG2/6/10/14)
CLK (#1) CLK (#0)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in the figure below:

OPE MB

ALM0 ALM1 PALM

Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)

CHAPTER 3 Page 240 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK18 Clock

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:
LAMP OPE ALM 0 ALM 1 PALM COLOR Green Red Red Red MEANING Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. Lights when clock signal failure has occurred. Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred. Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 241 Revision 1.0

PH-CK18 Clock

6.

External Interface

ISWM CLK10 (Slot No.12) CLK00 (Slot No.08)

DCS Connection

ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1

PLO-CLK CA-A

DIU Connection Note

MDF

Installation Cable

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35

LEAD NAME

DIU DIU DIU DIU

3B 2B 1B 0B

PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

LEAD NAME

DIU DIU DIU DIU

3A 2A 1A 0A

Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CHAPTER 3 Page 242 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-CK18 Clock

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

REMARKS

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 243 Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

PA-8COTBJ
Central Office Trunk
1. General Function The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 8C.O. lines and the system. And this card also provides the caller ID service. Depending upon keys setting of this card, the first circuit on this card can be used as an interface for Paging Equipment. In this instance, the second circuit is also used for the purpose of activating the Paging Equipment. Example of the Paging Equipment and Caller ID service are illustrated below. In addition, the appropriate value of Terminal Impedance and Balancing Network (BNW) can be selected by key setting. This diagram shows an example where this card is used as both a PGT and COTs.
SW
PA-8COTBJ MDF Speech Line Control Line G MODEM To Battery PAGING EQUIPMENT

INT

INT

PGT
"555-1234"

circuit 1 circuit 2

PGT Terminal

ATI Attendant Console

COT COT
circuit 7 circuit 8 "555-1234" PUBLIC NETWORK

MODEM "555-1234"

Local I/O Bus CPU GT


Terminal

Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04 05

PIM
06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 Page 244 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-39.

OPE SW00 (MB) BL4~7

BL0~3

SW01 (MB0-7)

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW05

Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.
8COT Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME OPE BL0 BL7

COLOR Green Green OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state. BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 245 Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH SW00 (MB)

SETTING UP DOWN ON OFF

MEANING Circuit card make busy

Circuit card make busy cancel Request for make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch.

SW01 (MB0-7)

Request for cancelling the make-busy of the trunk circuit corresponding to MB switch. Terminal Impedance and B.N.W.setting
SW0 (SW10) 1 2 3 4 MEANINGS Terminal B.N.W. Impedance

SW02

1-4

OFF OFF OFF OFF EIA/TIA 464-A 600 +2.16 OFF ON ON OFF CCITT Q.517 900 +2.16 ON ON ON OFF 900 Other Combinations Inhibited

1 2 SW03 3 4 1 2 SW04 3 4 1 2 SW05 3 4

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to OFF (Not Used) Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Paging Trunk is available (When this switch is set to ON, CH0 and CH1 cannot be used as CO trunks.) Paging Trunk is not available.

Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 246 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 247 Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

Cable Connections for a C.O. Line

PBX

Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector

MDF A B PUBLIC NETWORK

COT

Cable Connections for Paging Equipment PBX Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector B1 A1 -48V FUSE G -48V G G Control Line MDF A B PAGING EQUIPMENT Speech Path

COT

Note:

As illustrated above, two circuits (#0, #1) are required for connecting paging equipment.
Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance Balancing Network
350 1k 600 0.21F 600+2.16 900 2.16F

Terminal Impedance

EIA/TIA 464-A

900
900 100 0.05F 2.16F

CCITT Q. 517 AT&T Echo Test Network

800

CHAPTER 3 Page 248 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8COTBJ Central Office Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)
OFF
No.8 No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1

MODULE

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS UP: Circuit card make busy. DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel.

SW01 (MB0-7)

Make Busy switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits. ON: Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON

1 234

ON

SW02 PIM

SW03

1 234

ON

SW04

1 234

ON

SW05

1 234

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 249 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

PA-16COTBE
Central Office Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is accommodated in the PIM and supports the following interface. (a) Interface with 16 C.O. lines (b) Interface with 14 C.O. lines and 1 Paging Equipment line.
TSW COT

C.O. Line LC

Paging Equipment

Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 250 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 251 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-43.

OPE SW00(MB) BL15

BL0

SW0 SW1

SW02(MB8-15)

SW01(MB0-7)

Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

STATE

OPE BL0

Green Green Flash OFF

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit is in make busy state. BL- lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BL15

CHAPTER 3 Page 252 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy No. 0 Circuit make busy cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy No. 1 Circuit make busy cancel No. 2 Circuit make busy No. 2 Circuit make busy cancel No. 3 Circuit make busy No. 3 Circuit make busy cancel No. 4 Circuit make busy No. 4 Circuit make busy cancel No. 5 Circuit make busy No. 5 Circuit make busy cancel No. 6 Circuit make busy No. 6 Circuit make busy cancel No. 7 Circuit make busy No. 7 Circuit make busy cancel

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

3 SW01 (MB0 ~ 7) 4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 253 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 0

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING No. 8 Circuit make busy

MEANING

No. 8 Circuit make busy cancel No. 9 Circuit make busy No. 9 Circuit make busy cancel No. 10 Circuit make busy No. 10 Circuit make busy cancel No. 11 Circuit make busy No. 11 Circuit make busy cancel No. 12 Circuit make busy No. 12 Circuit make busy cancel No. 13 Circuit make busy No. 13 Circuit make busy cancel No. 14 Circuit make busy No. 14 Circuit make busy cancel No. 15 Circuit make busy No. 15 Circuit make busy cancel

3 SW02 (MB8 ~ 15) 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 254 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING Terminal Impedance


SW0 (SW10)

MEANING

MEANING

1-4

1 OFF OFF

2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF Other Combinations

Terminal impedance 600 + 2.16 F 900 + 2.16 F Not used

Wink Signal Detection Time.


SW0 (SW10) Detection Time 5 6

SW0 (SW10)

5, 6

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON

56 ms 96 ms 136 ms 176 ms

Answer Signal Detection Time.


SW0 (SW10) Detection Time 7 8

7, 8

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON

56 ms 96 ms 136 ms 176 ms

Note:

Switch No.5-8 is only available when SP-3331 is used for E911 service. If SP-3003 is used, these switches are fixed to off.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 255 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING Fixed

MEANING

Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than three seconds.)

3 OFF ON SW1 (SW11) 4 OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing signal does not arrive longer than six seconds.) Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a Paging trunk (No. 1 Circuit cannot be used as a C.O. trunk) Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a C.O. trunk (No. 1 Circuit can be used as a C.O. trunk)

Fixed Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

CHAPTER 3 Page 256 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk PAD Setting ARTD 7 2 3 4 APAD 15 2 3 4 TRANSMIT (D-A) PAD 0dB 3dB 6dB 0dB RECEIVE (A-D) PAD 0dB 3dB 6dB -5dB (Gain) REMARKS

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 257 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-44.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 258 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 259 Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

Connection with C.O. Line

MDF NEAX2400 IPX A C.O. Line B0 B

COT

A0

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

Connection with Paging Equipment

MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 A

Speech Signal Leads

COT

Paging Equipment B

B1 (MR) B0

G G -48V

G -48V

FUSE

Distibution Board

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 260 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16COTBE Central Office Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS UP : Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

MODULE

SW00 (MB)

ON

OFF
No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0

SW01 (MB0-7)

Make Busy Switches associated with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits. ON : Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON

OFF

PIM SW02 (MB8-15)


No.7 No.6 No.5 No.4 No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0

Make Busy Switches associated with No. 8 through No. 15 Circuits. ON : Make busy on each circuit basis. OFF: Make busy cancel on each circuit basis.
ON

SW0

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW1

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 261 Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

PA-CS02-C
Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is an attendant console (ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function for accommodating ATTCON (maximum two sets of ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc. The PA-CS02-C card is exclusively for a system which adopts -law as its encoding law.

: Control Line : Speech Path 12M PCM Highway IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

SW

2M PCM Highway

12

INT I/O Local Bus PM Bus 2 ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)

CPU

GATE

ATI

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS02-C (ATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ATI

ATI

CHAPTER 3 Page 262 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47.

SW3 SW2 OPE N-OPE SW6 SW7 MB

BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0

SW8

3 2 1 0

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 263 Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication

LAMP
OPE N-OPE

COLOR
Green Red Red

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use. Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

BLS0 BLS1 BLA0 BLA1

Flash Red Flash

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NO.

SWITCH

SETTING
UP

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
Circuit card make busy

MB

DOWN
1 SW2-1/ SW3-1 2

Circuit card make busy cancel

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW2-2/ SW2-3/ SW2-4/ RESISTANCE SW3-2 SW3-3 SW3-4 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410

SW2 (TAS1) SW3 (TAS0)


3

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 264 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

SWITCH

SWITCH NO.
1

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SW6 (TAS1) SW7 (TAS0)

2 3 4

SW6-1/ SW7-1

SW6-2/ SW7-2

SW6-3/ SW7-3

SW6-4/ SW7-4

TAS (A WIRE)

TAS (B WIRE)

ON OFF OFF OFF

ON ON ON OFF

ON OFF OFF OFF

ON OFF ON ON

-48V CR G LOOP

G G G LOOP

ON
0

No. 0 circuit make-busy request

OFF ON SW8
1

Normal setting No. 1 circuit make-busy request Normal setting Not used Not used

OFF
2 3

OFF OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 265 Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-48.

Mounting Module

PIM
< LT Connector on the ATT TERM> 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B 43 44 TAS 1B 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

[ATT TERM (PZ-M366)]

LT

To LT5/LT11

RLT

ATT1

ATT0 SW0
ON ON 1 2 3 4

SW1
1 2 3 4

IC

TAS 0A TAS 1A

LT0 Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

ATI

ATI

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

CHAPTER 3 Page 266 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS02-C Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH SHAPE


1234 SW2

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME


PIM

REMARKS

1234 SW3

1234 SW6 12, 23 1234 SW7

OFF No.3 No.2 No.1 No.0 ON

SW8

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 267 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08
Hotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.
: Control Line : Speech Path I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus TDSW 2M PCM Highway

MUX PM Bus ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)

CPU

GT

HMATI

Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS08 (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HMATI HMATI

CHAPTER 3 Page 268 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-50.

SW03 SW02

SW08 SW07 OPE N-OPE SW04 MB

SW11 FU1 (Note )

FU0 (Note ) BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0 SW09 3 2 1 0

SW12

Note:

When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1. 2 3 <Extraction> 1 MB key ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card. <Insertion> 1 Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. 2 Plug in the FU0 and FU1. 3 MB key OFF

Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 269 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BLS0 BLS1 COLOR Green Red Red Blink Note: BLA0 BLA1 Red Blink The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.

CHAPTER 3 Page 270 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH

SETTING UP

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

MB

DOWN 1

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SW02 (TAS0) SW03 (TAS1)

2 3 4 1 ON OFF ON OFF

SWITCH

TAS (A WIRE)

TAS (B WIRE)

1 2 3 4

-48V CR G LOOP

G G G LOOP

Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

SW04

2 3 4 1

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW7-1/ SW8-1 SW7-2/ SW8-2 SW7-3/ SW8-3 SW7-4/ SW8-4 RESISTANCE

2 SW07 (TAS0) SW08 (TAS1) 3


ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 271 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface SWITCH NO. 1 STANDARD SETTING No. 0 System is in Make-busy request. Normal setting No. 1 System is in Make-busy request. Normal setting Not used Not used Fixed (all ON)

SWITCH

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

MEANING

Fixed

2 SW11 3

Fixed

Fixed

Fixed

2 SW12 3

SW9

1 2 3

Note:

When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I.

CHAPTER 3 Page 272 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-51.

Mounting Module

PIM PIM
LT5, 11 Connector (LT Connector on the ATT TERM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B0 43 TAS 1B0 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TAS 0A0 18 TAS 1A0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10

LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

HMATI

HMATI

PIM

Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 273 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS UP: Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

MB

1 2 3 4

SW02

1 2 3 4

SW03

ON

SW04

1 2 3 4

ON

SW07

1 2 3 4

ON

SW08

1 2 3 4

OFF No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 ON (Piano Switch) ON

SW09

SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used

SW11

1 2 3 4

ON

SW12

1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 274 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08-B
Hotel Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is Hotel attendant console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function for accommodating Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.

: Control Line : Speech Path I/O Local Bus : Input/Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus TSW 2M PCM Highway

MUX I/O Local Bus PM Bus ATTENDANT CONSOLE (2)

CPU

GT

HMATI

Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 275 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 HMATI 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HMATI

CHAPTER 3 Page 276 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

SW03 SW02

SW08 SW07 OPE N-OPE SW04 MB

SW11 FU1 (Note)

FU0 (Note) BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0 SW09 3 2 1 0

SW12

Note:

When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1. 1 <Extraction> MB key ON 2 Remove the FU0 and FU1. 3 Extract this card. 1 Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. 2 Plug in the FU0 and FU1. <Insertion> 3 MB key OFF

Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 277 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
LAMP OPE N-OPE BLS0 BLS1 COLOR Green Red Red Blink Note: BLA0 BLA1 Red Blink The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy

CHAPTER 3 Page 278 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH MB

SETTING UP DOWN

MEANING

Circuit card make busy Circuit card make busy cancel


SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)

SW02 (TAS0) SW03 (TAS1)

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

-48V CR G LOOP

G G G LOOP

SW04

1 2 3 4

ON OFF ON OFF

Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

SW07 (TAS0) SW08 (TAS1)

1
SW7-1/ SW8-1

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE SW7-2/ SW8-2 SW7-3/ SW8-3 SW7-4/ SW8-4 RESISTANCE

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

0 200 390 590 820 1020 1210 1410

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 279 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

SWITCH SW11

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

Fixed

OFF ON

Fixed

OFF ON

Fixed

4 SW12 1

OFF ON OFF

Fixed

ON OFF

Fixed (all ON)

ON OFF

4 SW9 0

ON OFF ON OFF ON

No. 0 System is in make-busy request.

Normal setting No. 1 System is in make-busy request. Normal setting Not used Not used

1 2 3 Note:

OFF OFF OFF

When PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I.

CHAPTER 3 Page 280 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-54.

Mounting Module

PIM

LT5, 11 Connector (LT Connector on the ATT TERM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B0 43 TAS 1B0 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TAS 0A0 18 TAS 1A0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10

LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

HMATI

HMATI

PIM

Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 281 Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B Hotel Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS UP: Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

MB

1 2 3 4

SW02

1 2 3 4

SW03

ON

SW04

1 2 3 4

ON

SW07

1 2 3 4

ON

SW08

1 2 3 4

OFF No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 ON (Piano Switch) ON

SW09

SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used

SW11

1 2 3 4

ON

SW12

1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 282 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

PA-CS33
Attendant Interface
1. General Function This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.

MUX PCM HW PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW PM BUS

PCM HW TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT MUX LC/TRK ATI PM BUS

DESK CONSOLE

Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 283 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ATI ATI

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-56.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OPE SW00 PALM BLA1 BLA0 BLS1 BLS0

SW17 SW11 SW10 SW13 SW12 SW15 SW14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW01

SW16

Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)

CHAPTER 3 Page 284 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Red

STATE Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally. Off when circuit card is not operating. Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred. Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on the Desk Console). Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns onPA lamp on the Desk console). Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use. Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted. Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.

PALM

BLA0 BLA1

Flash (60 IPM) OFF Red

BLS0 BLS1

Flash (60 IPM) OFF

5.

Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SW00

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card is Make-busy.

MEANING

Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO 0

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console. Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.

Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console. Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.

SW01

1 OFF 2 3 OFF OFF Not used. Not used.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 285 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO STANDARD SETTING

SETTING

MEANING

SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively. 1
SW10-3/ SW13-3 SW10-2/ SW13-2 SW10-1/ SW13-1 STANDARD SETTING RESISTANCE

ON ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

0 220 398 618 800 1020 1198

SW10 (TAS#0) SW13 (TAS#1)

ON

ON OFF OFF OFF

OFF

1418

This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/15.

SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4 (TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1). SW11/ SW12 (TAS#0) SW14/ SW15 (TAS#1)
SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED SW12/ SW15 SW11/ SW14 SW10-4/ SW13-4 STANDARD SETTING TAS 0A/ TAS 1A TAS 0B/ TAS 1B

ON OFF OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF ON

CR -48V

G G LOOP G

LOOP G

CHAPTER 3 Page 286 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO STANDARD SETTING

SETTING

MEANING

For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel application, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.
Desk Console Key pattern to be used SYS 1 INDEX 160 SW16-1 SW16-7 Bit 1 Bit 0

1
Hotel type ON

ON OFF ON OFF

1 0

1 1 1 0

Business type

OFF

2 SW16 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2

ON OFF

Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available. Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.

SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as shown below.


SW16-5 SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY

ON ON

ON OFF Other combinations

OFF ON

NORTH AMERICA AUSTRALIA Not used

ON OFF Refer to SW16-1. OFF ON OFF ON

A-law PCM coding. -law PCM coding. Not used (Fixed to OFF). Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals. PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission. Fixed to ON.

Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6. 3 SW17 4
SYS 1 INDEX 6 SW17-3 SW17-4 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0

5~7 8 Note Note:

OFF ON OFF

Fixed to OFF. Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization. Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.

DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card initialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 287 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

6.

External Interface Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-57.

Mounting Module

PIM
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

LT5, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

Note:

The lead for each ADD ON CONSOLE is shown below.

BN4800 BN4820 BN4810 BN4830 B0 B2 B1 B3

BN4801 BN4821

Note:

The lead for each DESK CONSOLE is shown below.

#0 ADD ON MODULE A0 B0 BN4800 - 48v BN4801 - 48v

#1 ADD ON MODULE A1 B1 BN4810 - 48v BN4811 - 48v

BN4811 BN4831 A0 A2 A1 A3 #0 DESK CONSOLE A2 B2 BN4820 - 48v BN4821 - 48v #1 DESK CONSOLE A3 B3 BN4830 - 48v BN4831 - 48v

LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10

LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 19 23 14 18 22 13 17 21 12 16 20 15 19 23 14 18 22 13 17 21 12 16 20

01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.

01 03 05 07 09 11

00 02 04 06 08 10

00 02 04 06 08 10

ATI

ATI

PIM

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

CHAPTER 3 Page 288 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

PBX Installation Cable ATI A2 B2 BN4820 BN4821 (-48V) (-48V) A2 B2 BN4820 BN4821 GND GND

MDF

IDF

6-PIN MODULAR ROSETTE

#0 DESK CONSOLE

6-PIN MODULAR CABLE

#1 DESK CONSOLE A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 GND GND

GND (PZ-M377)

Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram Note:

The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 289 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Desk Console. Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.
Bottom View

6-core Modular Cable


PAGE LINE (8-core) REC (6-core) (8-core)

6-core Modular Block

IDF/MDF

DESK CONSOLE

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment


PIN LEAD PIN LEAD No. NAME No. NAME 26 1 27 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

DESK CONSOLE
Desk Console Modular Jack Transformer Surge Protection

6-core Modular Cable


GND - 48 V A1 B1

BN4800 BN4820

BN4801 BN4821

BN4810 BN4830 B2 B0 B1 B3

BN4811 BN4831 A0 A2 A1 A3 Add-on for Console 0 Console 0 Add-on for Console 1 Console 1

DC/DC Convertor

GND 48V/24V

GND - 48 V

Note:

GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)

Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection

Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.
Source PBX Local Power Supply 0.5 Cable 1,148 ft. (350 m) 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 0.65 Cable 1,640 ft. (500 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m)

CHAPTER 3 Page 290 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

If the distance exceeds the above, estimate it according to the calculation after Figure 3-60.

m A PBX Installation Cable


A2 B2 BN4820 (-48V) BN4821 (-48V)

C
6-pin Modular rosette
A B BN4820 BN4821

MDF

IDF

#0 DESK CONSOLE

ATI

6-pin Modular Cable

GND GND

#1 DESK CONSOLE
A3 B3 BN4830 BN4831 A B BN4830 BN4831 GND GND

GND (PZ-M377)

Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 291 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 as shown in the following formula: m = a + b + c < 26 = m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C Example of Calculation a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:
Note:

You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae.You may use cable lengths in feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot. Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables u (/m) x (m) u (/m) x (m) +

21 No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

a=

22 No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

b=

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables v (/m) y (m) v (/m) y (m) +

22 No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

c=

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables w (/m) z (m) w (/m) z (m) +

u: DC resistance per meter in the range of A (/m) v: DC resistance per meter in the range of B (/m) w: DC resistance per meter in the range of C (/m) x: Cable length (m) in the range of A y: Cable length (m) in the range of B z: Cable length (m) in the range of C

CHAPTER 3 Page 292 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-61.

Mounting Module

PIM

PIM
LT5, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

TAS1B TAS0B

TAS1A TAS0A

LT5 LT0
Slot No.

LT11

LT1

LT2

LT3

LT4

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

ATI

ATI

PIM

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 293 Revision 1.0

PA-CS33 Attendant Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

SW00

OFF

SW01
ON ON

SW10 (TAS #0)

1 2 3 4

SW13 (TAS #1)

1 2 3 4

ON

SW11 (TAS #0)


OFF ON

SW12 (TAS #0)


OFF ON

SW14 (TAS #1)


OFF ON

SW15 (TAS #1)


OFF ON

SW16

12 34 56 78

ON

SW17

12 34 56 78

ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 294 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

PA-8LCBR
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-8LCBR circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of eight analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for each channel. This card can be used for Caller ID service.

INT PUBLIC NETWORK C.O. Line COT

SW

(PA-8LC BR) Analog Terminal LC max. 1200 []

Loop Resistance : Max. 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 8 circuits Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)

Local I/O Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 295 Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 296 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-63.

OPE SW00 (MB) BL7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

SW11 SW12

SW13 SW14

SW15 SW16

SW01 SW10

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0 Green

BL7

Flashing

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 297 Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on this circuit card have the following meanings.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed Fixed

1 SW10 2 3 4 SW11 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 SW14 2

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SW12

Fixed

SW13

Fixed Momentary Open Polarity Reverse Message Waiting Lamp flashes (1-sec. ON, 1-sec. OFF) Message Waiting Lamp lights or flashes (Selected and Controlled by software)

1 SW15 2 1 Note 1 SW16 2 Note 2

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

Fixed Stutter Dial Tone is available Stutter Dial Tone is not available Ringer Timer mode: Common mode Ringer Timer mode: Separate mode Pre-ringing is not available Pre-ringing is available

OFF

Note 1: When Caller ID is in service, set SW16-1 to OFF (Separate mode). Note 2: Valid when SW16-1 is set to ON (Common mode).

CHAPTER 3 Page 298 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

SWITCH Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.

SETTING
ON

SW01 (BNW0 - 7)
12 34 5 678

OFF ON

BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) For long distance

BNW: 600 For short distance

OFF

Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are composed as follows.

BNW2 (ON)
350 1000

BNW1 (OFF)

600 0.21

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 299 Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown Figure 3-64.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

CHAPTER 3 Page 300 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

MDF NEAX2400 IPX

A0 LC B0

L1 L2 Rosette Telephone

Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 301 Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

12 34

ON

SW10

SW01 (BNW 0 - 7)

12 34 567 8

ON

1 2

ON

SW11

Fixed

1 2

ON

PIM

SW12

Fixed

1 2

ON

SW13

Fixed

1 2

ON

SW14

1 2

ON

SW15

1 2

ON

SW16

CHAPTER 3 Page 302 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

PA-16LCBE
Line Circuit
1. General Function This circuit card provides the interface for 16 station lines. This circuit card is provided with functions for supervising each user's call origination, call answering, release, detection of switch hook flashing, relaying of DP/PB signals, transmission of ringing signals to the called side, and bothway transmissions of voice band signals. For use of this circuit card, there are the following limitations. (a) There are four kinds of balancing network, each of which is set up according to the line conditions involved. (b) PAD is only for receiving side 5 dB (at the time of station to station call).

TSW COT C.O. Line

16LC

(MAX. 16 Stations)

Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 303 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 304 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.

OPE MB BL15 SW1

BL0

SW0

BNW8-15

BNW0-7

Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE BL0

COLOR Green Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is opening. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes (60 IPM) to dial pulses at the time of an outgoing call or when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BL1S

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 305 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make busy.

Circuit card make busy cancel. Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

1 2 SW0 3 4

OFF OFF OFF OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 306 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For long distance.

Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For short distance. Note:

OFF ON

OFF ON

4 BNW0 ~ 7 5

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF. However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting referring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE BALANCING NETWORK LINE RESISTANCE SWITCH

Short Distance Long Distance

0 ~ 100 More than 100

OFF ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 307 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For long distance.

Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For short distance. Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For long distance. Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For short distance. Note:

OFF ON

OFF ON

4 BNW8 ~ 15 5

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF

Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF. However, when the station line is long (PBX Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting referring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN THE LINE RESISTANCE BALANCING NETWORK LINE RESISTANCE SWITCH

Short Distance Long Distance

0 ~ 100 More than 100

OFF ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 308 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Polarity Reversal as Disconnect Signal


SW1-4

Momentary Open as Disconnect Signal Fixed

OFF

SW1-3

INTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN 0.4/0.2/0.4-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station

3
OFF (standard) OFF (standard)

0.4

0.4

2.0

0.2

Rering
0.4 0.2 0.8 0.4 0.2 4.0

0.2/0.2/0.2/0.2-ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station


0.2 0.2 0.2 2.0

OFF

ON

0.2 0.2

Rering

SW1

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

0.4

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

4.0

0.35/0.3/0.35-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station


0.35 0.35

2.0

ON

OFF
Rering

0.3

0.35

0.7

0.35

4.0

0.3

0.3

0.2/0.4/0.2-ON/OFF/ON Incoming call from C. O. line/station


0.2 0.2 2.2

ON

ON

0.4

Rering
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.4 0.2 4.2

0.2 0.4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 309 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 5

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SW1-5

SW1-6

SWITCH SETTING FOR MW LAMP CONTROLLING

6 SW1 ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

OFF OFF ON

OFF ON OFF

In the case of lighting (normal setting) In the case of 60 IPM flashing In the case of lighting or flashing (As controlled by the software)

Stutter Dial Tone Available

Stutter Dial Tone Not Available Pre-signaling is not performed. Pre-signaling is performed.

CHAPTER 3 Page 310 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-68 below.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 311 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 312 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 L1 L2 Rosette Ordinary Telephone

LC

Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 313 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE

SW0

ON

12 3 4

SW1

ON

1 23 456 78

PIM BNW0-7
ON 1 23 456 78

BNW8-15

ON

1 23 456 78

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel.

CHAPTER 3 Page 314 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-A
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBJ-A circuit card,which is exclusively used in a -law system, provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance.This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

INT PUBLIC NETWORK C.O. Line COT

SW

(PA-16LC BJ-A) Analog Terminal LC max. 600 []

Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuits Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law : -law.

Local I/O Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 315 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 316 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-71.

SW13 OPE SW00 (MB) BL12-15 BL8-11

BL4-7

BL0-3

SW12

SW11 SW10 (BNW8-15) (BNW0-7)

Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 317 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3)Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0 Green BL15

CHAPTER 3 Page 318 Revision 1.0

Flashing

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make busy. Circuit card make busy cancel. CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK

ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW10 (BNW0~7) 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

Compromise

No. 0

600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600

No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

No. 6

No. 7

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 319 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK Compromise No. 8 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600 Compromise 600

OFF ON

No. 9

OFF ON

No. 10

4 SW11 (BNW8~15) 5

OFF ON OFF ON

No. 11

No. 12

OFF ON

No. 13

OFF ON

No. 14

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

No. 15

1 SW12 2

Immediate is not available. Immediate is available. Stutter dial tone is available Message Waiting Lamp is available Momentary Open Polarity Reverse

SW13

CHAPTER 3 Page 320 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-72.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 321 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 322 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

MDF NEAX2400 IPX A0 B0 L1 L2 Rosette Ordinary Telephone

LC

Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 323 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

UP : Circuit card make busy

SW10 (BNW 0 - 7)

0 123 45 67

ON

PIM

SW11 (BNW 8 - 15)

0 123 45 67

ON

SW12

12

ON

OFF

ON

SW13
(RVS) (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 Page 324 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-B
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBJ-B circuit card, which is exclusively used in a -law system, provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

INT PUBLIC NETWORK C.O. Line COT

SW

(PA-16LC BJ-B) Analog Terminal LC max. 600 []

Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuit Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp Encoding Law : -law

Local I/O Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 325 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 326 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-75.

SW16

OPE MB BL15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

SW15 SW13

3 2 1 0

SW10

SW11

Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATE Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

MEANING The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3)Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0 Green BL15

Flashing

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 327 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LC BJ-B card have the following meanings.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Card make-busy (Inserted state) Card make-busy cancel (Operating state) Fixed to OFF Stutter dial tone is available Stutter dial tone is not available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message waiting lamp flashes (1-sec. ON/1-sec. OFF) Message waiting lamp lights or flashes (controlled by software) Fixed to OFF Momentary open Polarity reverse

SWITCH NAME SW00(MB)

SETTING UP DOWN

MEANING

1 SW13
ON 12 34

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

2 3 4 1

SW15
ON 12 34

3 OFF 4 SW16 OFF ON OFF


OFF (RVS) ON (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 Page 328 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SETTING
ON

SW-10 (BNW0 - 7)
12 34 567 8

Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 0 - 7.

OFF ON

BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) for long distance

BNW: 600 for short distance

w w

OFF ON

SW-11 (BNW8 - 15)


12 34 567 8

Balancing Network Designation Each element corresponds to circuits 8 - 15.

OFF ON

BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) for long distance

BNW: 600 for short distance

w w

OFF

Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are composed as follows.

ON
350 1000

OFF

600 0.21 compromise impedance (EIA/TIA-464A)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 329 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-76.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 330 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 331 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

MDF NEAX2400 IPX

A0 LC B0

L1 L2 Rosette Telephone

Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 332 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBJ-B Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB)

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

SW13

12 34

ON

SW15

12 34

ON

PIM
OFF ON

SW16
(RVS) (OPEN)

SW10 (BNW0-7)

0 12 3 45 67

ON

SW11 (BNW8-15)

01 23 456 7

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 333 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

PA-16LCBW
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition momentary open/reverse battery function is provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.

INT PUBLIC NETWORK C. O. line

SW

COT

(PA-16LCBW) Analog Terminal max. 1200 [] LC

Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal Resistance) Open Function: x 15 circuits Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable) Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law: -law

I/O Local Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 334 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-79.

3.

OPE SW00 (MB) SW18 BL15

BL0

SW17

SW16 SW15

SW14

SW10

SW11

Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 335 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

LAMP COLOR Green

LAMP STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

MEANING OF INDICATION The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0

Green Flashing

BL15

CHAPTER 3 Page 336 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB) FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING ON Circuit Card Make-busy Key OFF MEANING Circuit card make-busy Circuit card make-busy cancel (Normal operating mode) North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) (Note) for long distance. North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : 600 (Note) for short distance

SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Balancing Network Designation


ON OFF

ON

Each element on this switch OFF corresponds to circuit #0-#7.

Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 . (For North America, Other Country ( Law))
ON OFF

350

1000 0.21 600

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 337 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

SWITCH SW11 (BNW8-15)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH No.

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING

ON OFF

Balancing Network Designation Each element on this (This same as previous page) switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15. 1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Stutter Dial Tone Available Stutter Dial Tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

SW14
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

2 3 4 1

SW15
1 2 3 4

ON

2
OFF

3 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 338 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

SWITCH SW16
1 2 3 4

No. 1

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Momentary open Polarity reverse

ON OFF

2 3 4 1 2

SW17
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

Message Waiting Lamp OFF

4 SW18 Polarity reverse or Momentary Open (circuit #15 Only )

OFF ON OFF

ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 339 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-80.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-81).

CHAPTER 3 Page 340 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 341 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.


MDF PBX Installation Cable LC LT Connector A B L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 342 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBW Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE SLOT No. PIM

REMARKS

SW10 (BNW0-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW11 (BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW14

1 2 3 4

ON

SW15

1 2 3 4

ON

SW16

1 2 3 4

ON

SW17

1 2 3 4

ON

OFF

ON

SW18
(RVS) (OPEN)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 343 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

PA-16LCBY
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition polarity reverse function is provided for 16 channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.
Note:

The PA-16LCBY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

TSW/INT

PUBLIC NETWORK

C. O. LINE COT

(PA-16LCBY) LC

(PA-8RSTY) RST

Analog Terminal

max. 1200 []

Loop Resistance : Max 1200[] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 16 circuits Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) Encoding Law : -law

Local I/O Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 Page 344 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-83.

OPE SW00 (MB) BL15

SW19 BL0 SW17 SW16 SW15 SW14

SW10 (BNW0-7)

SW11 (BNW8-15)

Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 345 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

LAMP COLOR Green

LAMP STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

MEANING OF INDICATION The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

BL0 ~ BL15

Green Flashing

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB) FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING OFF Circuit Card Make-busy Key ON Circuit card make-busy MEANING Circuit card make-busy cancel

SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Balancing Network Designation Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #0-#7. When this switch has been set, see SW14.

ON

North America, Other Country ( Law) BNW : Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) (Note ) for long distance

ON OFF

OFF

North America, Other Country ( Law) (Note ) BNW : 600 for short distance

CHAPTER 3 Page 346 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

SWITCH SW11 (BNW8-15)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No.

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING

ON OFF

Balancing Network Designation Each element on this [the same as previous page] switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15. 1 OFF ON OFF OFF North America Brazil China Other Country 1 ON PAD (Australia Only) OFF 2 3 4 ON OFF OFF OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

SW14
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

2 3 4

SW15
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

OFF

Fixed to OFF

NEAX 2400 PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB ICS-PBX PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB Stutter Dial Tone Available Stutter Dial Tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 347 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

SWITCH SW16
1 2 3 4

No. 1

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF

ON OFF

2 3 4 1 2

SW17
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

Message Waiting Lamp OFF

4 SW19
1 2 3 4

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

1
ON OFF

2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 348 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit Note:

Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600. (For North America, Other Country ( Law))
ON OFF

350

1000 0.21 600

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 349 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-84.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 350 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 351 Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.


MDF PBX Installation Cable LC LT Connector A B L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 352 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16LCBY Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE SLOT No. PIM

REMARKS

Note:

Normal operating mode is down.

SW10 (BNW0-7)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW11 (BNW8-15)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

SW14

1 2 3 4

ON

SW15

1 2 3 4

ON

SW16

1 2 3 4

ON

SW17

1 2 3 4

ON

SW19

1 2 3 4

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 353 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

PA-16ELCJ
Electric Line Current
1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the D term and the IPX. Depending on the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications only) 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and data communications)
16 ELC MODE
IPX IMX

8 DLC MODE IMX IPX


#0

term

DTE

#0

term

ELC

Data Adapter ELC

DTE
D
term #15

term

#7

Data Adapter

Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System

There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for D term Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the D term performance depending on each firmware EPROM.
Table 3-3 Performance FIRMWARE SP-3295 16ELC J PROG-B Dterm SERIES E 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available. Dterm SERIES III

Month and year (last two digits) also displayed following the time and date. Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed.

SP-3270 16ELC J PROG-A

16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available.

Software keys are available. However, key function is fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).

CHAPTER 3 Page 354 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-87.

OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15

BL0

SW01

Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 355 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Green

STATE Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

PALM

BL0 Flash OFF Note:


-

BL15

When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the PA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. i)

CHAPTER 3 Page 356 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.

SWITCH

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.

SW00 (MB) Circuit Card Makebusy key

Circuit card Make-busy.


ON

12345678

1
OFF

See Table 3-4 below.


ON

SW01
12345678

2 6 8

12345678

Always ON (fixed).
OFF 12345678 ON

16ELC mode. 7 ELC/DLC mode Designation


OFF 12345678 ON

8DLC mode.
OFF

Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7

SW01-7 SW01-1
ON OFF

ON 16 sets of Dterms per card. Voice Communication only. 16 sets of Dterms per card. Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the same time.

OFF 8 sets of Dterms per card. Data Adapter is used. 8 sets of Dterms per card. Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 357 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

6.

External Interface Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. 6ELC mode

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 358 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

16ELC mode

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 359 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE

REMARKS

PIM SW01
12345678 ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 360 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

PA-16ELCJ-B
Electronic Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between D term and IPX. Depending upon the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications only) 8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and data communications)
16 ELC MODE IPX
D
term #0

8 DLC MODE IPX


#0

DTE

term

ELC

Data Adapter

ELC

DTE
D
term #15

term

#7

Data Adapter

Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System Table 3-5 Performance Dterm SERIES E 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Month and year is displayed following the time and date. Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. Dterm SERIES III 16 digits wide of LCD. Month and year are not displayed. Software key is not available.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 361 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-90.

OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15

BL0 SW10 SW11

Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card

CHAPTER 3 Page 362 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green OFF Red OFF Green

STATE Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

PALM

BL0 Flash OFF Note:


-

BL15

When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit to all lines belonging to the PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. i)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 363 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.

SWITCH SW00 (MB)

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit Card Makebusy key Circuit Card Make-busy. SW10


ON OFF

12345678

LP-PM Interface mode setting

When firmware SP-3419 is used, and your system uses software Series 7300 Release 7 or earlier. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is not available. When firmware SP-3514 is used, and your system uses software Series 7400 Release 8 or later. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available. Not used.

12345678

ON OFF

12345678

ON OFF

12345678

ON

This circuit card is operated in 16 ELC mode.


OFF

Details are shown in the next table.

3-4

ELC/DLC mode setting

12345678

ON

This circuit card is operated in 8 DLC mode.


OFF

Do not set another combination.


12345678 ON

Analog Port Adapter is available. 5 Analog Port Adapter setting


OFF 12345678 ON

Analog Port Adapter is not available.


OFF 12345678 ON

6-8 SW11 1-8

OFF 12345678 ON

Fixed to OFF.

OFF

Fixed to all OFF.

CHAPTER 3 Page 364 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-5: OFF SW10-5: ON 16 set of Dterms per card. Voice Communication only. 16 set of D
term

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON 8 set of Dterms per card. Data Adapter is used. 8 set of Dterms per card.

s per card.

Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 365 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. 16ELC mode

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 366 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 367 Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

8DLC mode

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)

CHAPTER 3 Page 368 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE

REMARKS

PIM

SW10

12345678

ON

SW11

12345678

ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 369 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

PA-FCHA
Fusion Call Control Handler
1. General Function This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The FusionLink-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel (or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.

RJ-45 ETHER NET CONT CPU HDLC CONT

BWB LP-PM INT

FRONT CABLE D/I CONT DTI CONT FCH Note

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE

DTI

HUB (PA-M96)

CPU CPR

LANI (PZ-PC19)

Note:

This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.
Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 370 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

2.

Mounting Location/ Condition The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.

Mounting Module

PIM PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-94.

OPE MB LYR LB LOAD


EST3 EST2 EST1 EST0 PWALM

SW14 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10

1 2 3 4

MNT 10-BASE-T MODE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DTI
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 371 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while the Fusion link is established. Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM) Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test result is not fair. Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use. Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready. Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Forwarding Status) Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Blocking Status) Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Learning Status) Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Null Status) Remains lit while sending data. Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal. Remains lit while receiving data. Remains lit while the link is established. Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.

LYR

Flash OFF Green

LB OFF Green Flash (60 IPM) LOAD Flash (120 IPM) OFF EST3 EST2 EST1 EST0 PWALM Green Green Green Green Red

CHAPTER 3 Page 372 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

5.

Switch setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB Note

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION Circuit card Make-busy.

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Not used. Not used. Not used. Make-busy-request.

0 1 MNT 2 3 Note Note:

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Cancel the Make-busy-request.

The following operations are required prior to extracting the card. (1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch. (2.) Flip the MB switch.

SWITCH NAME

SETTING 0-7 8

STANDARD SETTING Not used.

DESCRIPTION

Standard setting. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) Fusion link test mode. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) Not used.

MODE 9 A-F

When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.
SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 Note 2~8 Note: STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON OFF OFF

DESCRIPTION T203 timer value is variable.

SW10

T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds. Not used.

T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 373 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION

This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.
SW11 D/I channel of T1

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW11 Note 1 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF


SW11-1 SW11-2 SW11-3 SW11-4 SW11-5 SW11-6 SW11-7 SW11-8 CH 0 CH 1 CH2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7

CHAPTER 3 Page 374 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW12 Note 1 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF
SW12-6 SW12-7 SW12-8 CH 13 CH 14 CH 15
SW12 D/I channel of T1

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.

SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 SW12-4 SW12-5

CH 8 CH 9 CH 10 CH 11 CH 12

Note 1: When n is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.

When n is one or more, the corresponding D channels as n must be designated by SW11-SW12.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 375 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

DESCRIPTION

This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to ON for D/I, OFF for denial.

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF SW13 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 Note 2 OFF SW14 ON 3 Note 2 OFF ON OFF

SW13

D/I channel of T1

SW13-1 SW13-2 SW13-3 SW13-4 SW13-5 SW13-6 SW13-7 SW13-8

CH 16 CH 17 CH 18 CH 19 CH 20 CH 21 CH 22 CH 23

Positive logic for the D/I CONT Negative logic for the D/I CONT The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.
SW14-2 SW14-3 SPEED

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

64 Kbps n 56 Kbps n 48 Kbps n Not used

4 Note 3

Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link performs as the network. LAPD signal link performs as the user.

CHAPTER 3 Page 376 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.

Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing. Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).
Note 3: When a node is set network, the distant node over the fusion link should be set user, and vice versa.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 377 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

6.

External Interface The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown below.

FCH

24DTR

DTI

FCH

CN2

10AL (10) FLT CA

10 BASE-T straight cable

HUB

Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection

CHAPTER 3 Page 378 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

See Figure 3-96 when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade connection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection. One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5) FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card. As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection. (a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card) (b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) (c) DCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. (Note)

Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH

Note

24DTR

FCH

FCH

FCH

DTI

DTI

DTI

CN2

FCH

FCH

FCH

To the next FCH/CCH/DCH

To HUB

Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection Note:

A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1 7.6 ).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 379 Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

OFF

MNT
ON

MODE

SW10

12 34 567 8

ON

1 23 4 56 78

ON

SW11

SW12

12 34 56 78

ON

SW13

1 234 56 78

ON

SW14

1 2 3 4

ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 380 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV
Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send Stutter Dial Tone, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

INT

SW

PUBLIC NETWORK

C. O. LINE COT

(PA-24LCBV) LC

Analog Terminal

max. 600 []

Loop Resistance : Max 600[] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Reverse Function : x 1 circuit Stutter Dial Tone Message Waiting Lamp Encoding Law : -law

I/O Local Bus CPU GT

Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 381 Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-98.

SW18

OPE2 OPE1 SW00 (MB)


BL23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BL23

SW11 (BNW8-15)

SW10 (BNW0-7)

BL0

CN SW13 SW12 (BNW16-23) SW15 SW16 SW17

SW14

Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this card are shown below.

LED NAME OPE1 OPE2

COLOR Green Green

LED STATUS Steady Lighting Steady Lighting Steady Lighting

DESCRIPTION The circuitry of circuit #0-#7 is operating normally. The circuitry of circuit #8-#23 is operating normally. Line loop exists. 1. Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

BL0 Green

BL23

Flashing

2. Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3. Line is in Make-busy state. 4. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

CHAPTER 3 Page 382 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on the PA-24LCBV (LC) card have the following meanings.
SWITCH SW00 (MB)
ON

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING
ON

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy cancel

OFF Circuit Card Make-busy Key ON


ON

Circuit card Make-busy

SW10 (BNW0-7)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Balancing Network Designation


ON OFF

ON

North America, Other Country (A/ Law) BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) (Note 1) for long distance.

Each element on this switch corresponds to OFF circuit #0-#7.

North America, Other Country (A/ Law) BNW : 600 (Note 1) for short distance

SWITCH SW11 (BNW8-15)


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

No.

FUNCTION Balancing Network Designation

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING

ON OFF

Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #8-#15.

The same as previous table.

SW12 (BMW16-23)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Balancing Network Designation


ON OFF

Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit #16-#23.

The same as previous table.

SW13
1 2 3 4

ON OFF

Selection of the User

SW13 SW13 SW13 SW13 -1 -2 -3 -4 ON OFF OFF OFF

North America

1 SW14
1 2 3 4

OFF Stutter Dial Tone ON OFF OFF OFF

Fixed to OFF Stutter Dial tone Available Stutter Dial tone not Available Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

ON OFF

2 3 4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 383 Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

SWITCH SW15
1 2 3 4

No. 1

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

MEANING Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

ON OFF

2 3 4 1 2

SW16
1 2 3 4

ON

3
OFF

Message Waiting Lamp OFF

4 1 2 SW17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3
ON OFF

4 5 6 7 8

SWITCH SW18

No.

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING ON

MEANING Momentary open Polarity reverse

ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch

Polarity reverse or Momentary Open OFF

Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 are as follows. ON OFF

350

1000 0.21 600

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)
CHAPTER 3 Page 384 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

6.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE SLOT No.

REMARKS

Note:

Normal operating mode is down.

SW10 (BNW0-7)

12 34 56 78

ON

SW11 (BNW8-15)

12 34 56 78

ON

SW12 (BNW16-23)

12 34 56 78

ON

ON

SW13 PIM

12 34

ON

SW14

12 34

ON

SW15

12 34

ON

SW16

12 34

SW17

12 34 56 78

ON

OFF

ON

SW18
(RVS) (OPEN)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 385 Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

7.

External Interface Location of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-99. (a) PIM When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.

Accommodated in 1 LT 4, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4

Accommodated in 2 LT 5, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 386 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

LT 4, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0

Accommodated in 3 LT 5, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23

B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15

A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 387 Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

(b) LC Connector Leads


LC Connector (1) CONN1
1A 2A 3A PKG1 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 LC CABLE 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

Champ Connector LT
B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 PKG3 PKG2 PKG1

LC Connector (2) CONN2


1A 2A 3A PKG2 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B

LC Connector (3) CONN3


1A 2A 3A PKG3 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

47 48 49 50

Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable)

CHAPTER 3 Page 388 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

8.

Connecting Route Diagram Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows. A and B leads for channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector located on the front edge of the card.

LT Connector PBX Installation Cable A8


PA-24LCBV

MDF

L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal

B8

A23 B23

L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Maximum 600 [] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Installation Cable A0 B0 LT Connector LC Cable A7 B7 L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal L1 L2 Jack Analog Terminal

Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 389 Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

9.

LC Cable Connection

3m (9.8 feet)

Earth Cable

Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable

CHAPTER 3 Page 390 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24LCBV Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV

LC Cable LC Cable

LC Cable

Earth Plate

FRO

NT
LT Cable

Earth Cable

REA

Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 391 Revision 1.0

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

PA-M69
Power Failure Transfer
1. General Function This circuit card executes a C.O. line to the telephone or the release of a C.O. line due to a power supply failure, system down, software order, etc. This circuit card is also provided with the change circuit of 12 circuits.

NCU

MDF TEL TEL (AO, BO)

MDF LC (AI, BI)

LC

TSW

COT

MDF TRK (TI, RI)

MDF CO (TO, RO)

(NITE KEY) ATTCON

Position within the System

Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 392 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PA-M69
NDA-24296

PA-M69
CHAPTER 3 Page 393 Revision 1.0

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

3.

Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamp, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105.

OPE MB

NCU1

SW0 NCU0

Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU)

4.

Lamp Indication The contents of lamp indication of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green

STATE Remains lit even when PFT is being activated on any one of the 12 circuits.

CHAPTER 3 Page 394 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH NAME

SETTING UP DOWN

MEANING Circuit card make busy

MB 1 SW0 2 3 4

Circuit card make busy cancel Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

ON OFF OFF OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 395 Revision 1.0

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card, accommodation of the NCU connector on the front side of the circuit card, and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-106.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 6 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 KY1 KY3 KY5 KY7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 KY0 KY2 KY4 KY6

LT Connector Slot No.

LT0

LT1

LT2

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

CHAPTER 3 Page 396 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

NCU Connector Accommodation CHAMP Connector NCU0 Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line Station C.O. Line TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 BO00 BI00 TO00 TI00 BO01 BI01 TO01 TI01 BO02 BI02 TO02 TI02 BO03 BI03 TO03 TI03 BO04 BI04 TO04 TI04 BO05 BI05 TO05 TI05 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 AO00 AI00 RO00 RI00 AO01 AI01 RO01 RI01 AO02 AI02 RO02 RI02 AO03 AI03 RO03 RI03 AO04 AI04 RO04 RI04 AO05 AI05 RO05 RI05 Station No. 0 C.O. Line Station No. 1 C.O. Line Station No. 2 C.O. Line Station No. 3 C.O. Line Station No. 4 C.O. Line Station No. 5 C.O. Line TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK TEL LC CO TRK 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 BO06 BI06 TO06 TI06 BO07 BI07 TO07 TI07 BO08 BI08 TO08 TI08 BO09 BI09 TO09 TI09 BO10 BI10 TO10 TI10 BO11 BI11 TO11 TI11 CHAMP Connector NCU1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 AO06 AI06 RO06 RI06 AO07 AI07 RO07 RI07 AO08 AI08 RO08 RI08 AO09 AI09 RO09 RI09 AO10 AI10 RO10 RI10 AO11 AI11 RO11 RI11

No. 6

No. 7

No. 8

No. 9

No. 10

No. 11

Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 397 Revision 1.0

PA-M69 Power Failure Transfer

Front Connector NCU MDF NEAX2400 IPX

PFT

KY0 KY7

KY0 KY7

External Key Box

LC

A B

COT

A B

AO00 BO00 AI00 BI00 RO00 TO00 RI00 TI00

A B

Station

A B

C.O. Line

Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE

PIM

SW0

ON

12 3 4

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3 Page 398 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M96 HUB

PA-M96
HUB
1. General Function This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the 10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card. As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI) and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE DTI

FCH

10BASE-T cross cable is used HUB for cascade connection (PA-M96) CPU CPR #0 LANI (PZ-PC19)

CPU CPR #1

LANI (PZ-PC19) HUB (PA-M96) 10BASE-T straight cable

FCH

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE DTI

Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration. Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 399 Revision 1.0

PA-M96 HUB

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM0

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-110.

OPE MB ST7 CRS7

ST0

CRS0 SENS

x TP7-X x TP6-X x TP5-X x TP4-X x TP3-X x TP2-X x TP1-X x TP0-X


Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card

CHAPTER 3 Page 400 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M96 HUB

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE CRS0~CRS7

COLOR Green Green

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port. The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as shown in the table below.
SEL SWITCH MEANINGS

Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1 Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7) Lights when the TPn-X port is normal. Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port. (n = 0~7) Note 2

ST0~ST7

Green
2

Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally

regardless of the cable polarity.


Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048 bit-

times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the collision is over.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 401 Revision 1.0

PA-M96 HUB

5.

Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN 0 1

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy.

DESCRIPTION

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). Not used.

SENSE

2 3 4-F

TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7). Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). Not used.

CHAPTER 3 Page 402 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M96 HUB

6.

External Interface

FCH DTI

24DTR

HUB FCH CN2

10AL (10) FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

10 BASE-T straight Cable


Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 403 Revision 1.0

PA-M96 HUB

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB

SEL

CHAPTER 3 Page 404 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M103 HUB

PA-M103
HUB
1. General Function This circuit card is a class II HUB card based on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX), which is located between 100M Ether card (PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) and FCCH card that establishes Fusion link to the system. This circuit card provides the repeater function, and 12 ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are accommodated on one HUB card. The state of each port is indicated on the LED. This card is used in IPX-UMG system.

To other Fusion Node

FCCH

DTI

DTI

FCCH

HUB 10BASE-T LP#0 LAN CPU LP#1 CPU

HUB 10BASE-T

LAN

CMP#0 LAN 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) HUB 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#0 LAN CPU

CMP#1 CPU LAN

100BASE-TX (P-BUS) 100BASE-TX (P-BUS) SP#1 LAN

LAN 10BASE-T

CPU

CPU

LAN 10BASE-T

HUB

HUB

MAT NIC

Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 405 Revision 1.0

PA-M103 HUB

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-M103 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM as shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Note:

Related to the length of Ether cable, it is recommended that this card ought to be mounted on the PIM within IMG0/4/8/12 (LPR accommodated IMGs). Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-113.

3.

TXRX L3 LA L9 L8 L7 L6

OPE PWALM L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 L0 TPB TPA TP9 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP2 TP1 TP0

Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card

CHAPTER 3 Page 406 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M103 HUB

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE PWALM L0-L9, LA, LB TXRX

COLOR Green Red Green Green

DESCRIPTION Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation Lights when the OBP (On Board Power) output voltage blownout Link has been established Data packet sending/receiving

5.

Switch Settings No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 407 Revision 1.0

PA-M103 HUB

6.

External Interface

HUB (PA-M103)

PZ-PC22(LANI)

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card

7.

Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required.

CHAPTER 3 Page 408 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTK
Register Sender Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card which transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals).

LC

Station

ATI ATT RST TSW

COT

C.O. Line

TLT

Tie Line

Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 409 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 410 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-116.

OPE N-OPE MB
BLS4 ~ BLS7

MBS4
BLR4 ~ ~ ~ BLR7

MBR7 MBR4
BLS3 BLS0

MBS3 SW1 SW0 MBS0


BLR3 BLR0

MBR0

Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE BLR0

COLOR Green Red Red Flash OFF Red Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLR7 BLS0 BLS7

NDA-24296

MBR3

MBS7

CHAPTER 3 Page 411 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make busy.

Circuit card make busy cancel. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy of the corresponding circuit. Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ON

1 MBR0~3 2

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

MBR4~7

OFF ON

OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 412 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME MBR4~7

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ON

Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ON

1 MBS0~3 2

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

5 MBS4~7 6

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 413 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF SW0 ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 8 OFF ON

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

-21.7 dBm0 -23.7 dBm0 -25.7 dBm0 -27.7 dBm0 -28.7 dBm0 -31.7 dBm0 -33.7 dBm0 -35.7 dBm0

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

-21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -28 dBm0 -31 dBm0 -33 dBm0 -35 dBm0

Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF). Fixed.

CHAPTER 3 Page 414 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING MFR Receive Specification; AT&T MFR Receive Specification; CCITT No. 5 PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.) PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

2 OFF 3 SW1 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 7 8 OFF OFF

Fixed Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of MFR. Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of PBR. Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of MFR. Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of PBR.

DPR Receive Specification; General Spec. DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec. No setting (Fixed to OFF) Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 415 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

MBR0-3

3 2 1 0

ON

MBR4-7

3 2 1 0

ON

MBS0-3 PIM

3 2 1 0

ON

MBS4-7

3 2 1 0

SW0

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW1

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3 Page 416 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTM
Register Sender Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals).

LC

Station

ATI ATT RST TSW

COT

C.O. Line

TLT

Tie Line

Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 417 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.

SW10

SW11 OPE MB
BLS4 ~ BLS7

MBS4
BLR7 BLR4 ~

MBR7 SW03 MBR4


BLS0 ~ BLS3

MBS3 MBS0
BLR0 ~ BLR3

~
MBR0

MBS7

SW04

SW02

Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST)

CHAPTER 3 Page 418 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

MBR3

SW01

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE BLR0 BLR7 BLS0

COLOR Green Red Flash OFF Red Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS7

5.

SWITCH NAME MB

Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

MEANING Circuit card Make-busy.

Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

1 MBR0~3 (SW01) 2

4 MBR4~7 (SW03)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 419 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME MBR4~7 (SW03)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1 MBS0~3 (SW02) 2

5 MBS4~7 (SW04) 6

CHAPTER 3 Page 420 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

-21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -29 dBm0 (standard setting) -31 dBm0 -33 dBm0 -35 dBm0

ON SW10 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON


SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE SW10-4 SW10-5 SW10-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON OFF ON OFF ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

-17 dBm0 -19 dBm0 -21 dBm0 -23 dBm0 (standard setting) -25 dBm0 -27 dBm0 -29 dBm0 -31 dBm0

6 OFF

OFF ON OFF

7 8

OFF ON

Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF). Fixed.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 421 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING MFR Receive Specification; AT&T MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5 PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.) PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

2 OFF 3 SW11 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

Fixed Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR. Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR. Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR. Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR. DPR Receive Specification; General Spec. DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec. No setting (Fixed to OFF) Fixed

6 7 8

CHAPTER 3 Page 422 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

MBR0-3 (SW01)

3 2 1 0

ON

MBR4-7 (SW03)

3 2 1 0

ON

MBS0-3 (SW02) PIM

3 2 1 0

ON

MBS4-7 (SW04)

3 2 1 0

SW10

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW11

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

MB

DOWN

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 423 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

PA-8RSTY
Register Sender Trunk
1. General Function The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has Register Sender function, by which interdigit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.
Note:

The PA-8RSTY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

This figure shows Register Sender function as an example.


PA-8RSTY PBR PBS DPR DPS OFF HOOK (LC for Calling Number Delivery) DP Signal LC DP Telephone Caller ID signals I/O Local Bus CPU GT PBR: Push Button Receiver PBS: PB Signal Sender DPR: Dial Pulse Register DPS: Dial Pulse Sender INT TSW INT PB line OGT PB Signal NETWORK

Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 424 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-120.

3.

Note:

Layout of Lamps and switches differ from other RST cards.


00 01 02 03 04
PZ-M565 (ISAGTA) PZ-ME44 (MEM) PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-PC22 (LANI) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PH-M22 (MMC) PWRSW0 (PH-PW14) PH-DK10 (DSPC) PWRSW1 (PH-PW14) HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

PH-PC43 (EMA)

CMP

PZ-M565 (ISAGTA)

PZ-ME44 (MEM)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

FANU

DUMMY

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 HSW01 (PU-SW01) TSW00 (PU-SW00-A) TSW01 (PU-SW00-A) TSW02 (PU-SW00-A) TSW03 (PU-SW00-A) PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) IOGT0 (PH-GT10) IOGT1 (PH-GT10) PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) TSW10 (PU-SW00-A) TSW11 (PU-SW00-A) TSW12 (PU-SW00-A) TSW13 (PU-SW00-A) HSW10 (PU-SW01) HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)

ISWM

00 01 02 03 04
PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC23 (LANI) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PH-PC43 (EMA) PH-IO24 (IOC) PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

SP

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 425 Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23 (LANI)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PC23 (LANI)

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE BLR0 BLR7

COLOR Green Green Flash OFF Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0 BLS7

CHAPTER 3 Page 426 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB (SW00) SW01 (MBR0-7)

SWITC SETTING H NO. UP DOWN 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

SW02 (MBS0-7)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 427 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH
SW10
1234

FUNCTION

SWITCH SETTING

MEANING

DTMF Signal Receiver Threshold Value [Standard Setting]


1234 ON OFF

Selection of PBR Threshold Value SW10- SW10- SW10DTMF Threshold Value 1 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0 -33.0 dBm0 -35.0 dBm0

4 SW11
1234

OFF MFR Signal Receiver Threshold Value

Fixed to OFF

[Standard Setting]
1234 ON OFF

Selection of MFR Threshold Value SW11- SW11- SW111 2 3 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF MFR Threshold Value -17.0 dBm0 -19.0 dBm0 -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0

OFF

Fixed to OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 428 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH

FUNCTION
Designation of MFR Specification 1

SWITCH SETTING
1234

MEANING
AT & T specification

1234

DTMF Signal Cut-off Guard Timer 2 SW12


1234 1234

ITU-T No. 5 specification

1234

SHORT (less than 10 ms)

LONG (less than 20 ms)

[Standard Setting] Register Selection (MFR/PBR) 3


1234

1234

REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.

Register Selection (MFR/PBR) 4


1234

REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.

1234

REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.

REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 429 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

SWITCH SW13

SWITCH SETTING NO. ON 1 OFF 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING MF Transmission Level:-9dBm MF Transmission Level:-5dBm

Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to ON Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF Fixed to OFF

SW14

1 2 3 4

SW15

1 2 3 4

SW16

1 2 3 4

SW17

1 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 Page 430 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS Circuit card make busy cancel Standard Setting : Down

MODULE PIM

SW00 (MB)

ON

ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SW01 (MBR0-7)

ON 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ON

SW02 (MBS0-7)

1234

SW10
ON

1234

SW11

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 431 Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk SWITCH NAME

MODULE PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH SHAPE
ON 1234

REMARKS

SW12
ON

1234

SW13
ON

1234

SW14
ON

1234

SW15
ON

1234

SW16
ON

1234

SW17

CHAPTER 3 Page 432 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTA
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTB card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A
FCH
SDTA

Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
SDTA

FCH

S D T B
SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

Internal LAN

Internal LAN

Fusion Link without FCCH


Fusion
Node-A
SDTA

Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Trunk (Speech Path)


SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

Trunk * ) SDT: SDH/SONET DigitalHandler FCH: Fusion Call Control


Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 433 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Mounting conditions are shown below. Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables. For single configuration: For dual configuration: SDT CABLEB <S> SDT CABLEA <D>

Fiber optic cables are connected to this card. Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW.

CHAPTER 3 Page 434 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example:

When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system In Figure 3-122, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted.

PIM3 (Not actually mounted)

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

PIM2 (Not actually mounted)


I/O PCM

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

I/O

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PCM

PIM1

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B

MUX

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PIM0

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

LPM

Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 435 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-123.

OPE ACT MB
PALM OPT SYNC LPB

P-SW

I/O SW11 SW12


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PCM

SC

Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)

CHAPTER 3 Page 436 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE PALM OPT SYNC LPB ACT

COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Green Green Off

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally. Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal. Lights when the optical input signals are cut off. Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock comes off synchronization. Lights when Loop-back is designated. Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 437 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

.
SWITCH NAME MB 1 2 3 4 5 SW11 6 7 8 SW12 1-8 1 2 3 4 SWITCH NO. SETTING UP DOWN OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy Circuit card Make-busy cancel Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Not used PAD function is effective. PAD function is not effective. Setting of A-law Setting of -law OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0) OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1) Not used Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back) Designation of OLLPB cancel Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back) Designation of ORLPB cancel. Not used Make-busy request Make-busy request cancel MEANING

P-SW

CHAPTER 3 Page 438 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

6.

External Interface Cable Connection

PA-SDTA

PA-SDTB

Fiber optic cable SDT CABLEB <S> Note1

Note 1: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used. Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 439 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system As shown in Figure 3-125, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/ PIM3 is not actually mounted.

PIM3 (Not actually mounted)

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

PIM2 (Not actually mounted)


I/O PCM

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

I/O

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PCM

PIM1

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B

MUX

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PIM0 Note MT24 TSW CA-140

MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

PH-SW10 (TSW)

PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX3 MUX2 MUX1

LPM

Note:

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.
Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System

CHAPTER 3 Page 440 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system (a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depending on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).
Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable IMG0 IMG1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D IMG2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F IMG3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

PIM3 PIM2 PIM1 PIM0

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 441 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.
Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot MODULE GROUP Assigned for SDT TIME SLOTS Assigned for SDT PIM2 of IMG0 MG01 PIM3 of IMG0 PIM2 of IMG1 MG03 PIM3 of IMG1 PIM2 of IMG2 MG05 PIM3 of IMG2 PIM2 of IMG3 MG07 PIM3 of IMG3 CABLE CONNECTIONS FROM (Connectors on PA-SDTB) MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B TO (Connectors on BWB of TSWM) MUX002 MUX102 MUX003 MUX103 MUX012 MUX112 MUX013 MUX113 MUX022 MUX122 MUX023 MUX123 MUX032 MUX132 MUX033 MUX133 REMARKS

In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG0 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG1 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG2 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required.

Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration. Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the

remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 442 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example:

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be mounted in any PIM.

PA-SDTB

PIM3

MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 LPM IMG0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H (Refer to Table 3-3.)

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 TSWM IMG1

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy IMG2

PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 0 Dummy IMG3

Time slots assigned for SDT (MG07). PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted.

To MUX133 To MUX033 To MUX132 To MUX032

BWB of TSWM
Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT. (Refer to Table 3-8 and Figure 3-133.)

Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 443 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

MUX133 MUX132

Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

MUX123 MUX122

MUX113 MUX112

MUX103 MUX102

MUX033 MUX032

MUX023 MUX022

MUX013 MUX012

MUX003 MUX002

CHAPTER 3 Page 444 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

(c) Length of Fiber Optic Cable The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3128 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

0.00

-5.00

Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm


-10.00

-15.00

-20.00

: Best Case : Worst Case : Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : Minimum Receiver Sensitivity

-25.00

-30.00

Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm


-35.00 0.00 2.00 1.20 4.00 2.40 6.00 3.70 8.00 4.40 10.00 6.20 12.00 14.00 7.40 8.60 16.00 18.00 9.90 11.00 20.00 (km) 12.00 (miles)

Cable Length
Figure 3-128 Level Diagram

Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is as shown in the following table.
Table 3-8 Level Margin CONDITION Worst case Best case Note: LEVEL MARGIN 4.0 dB 11.0 dB

Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 445 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-129.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 POUT B 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 POUT B 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 POUT A 22 23 24 25

Accommodated in 1 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 POUT B 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 POUT A 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

POUT A

Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.


LT Connector Slot No. LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

CHAPTER 3 Page 446 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

REMARKS

SW11

1 234 5 67 8

ON

SW12

1 234 5 67 8

ON

ON 1 234

P-SW

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 447 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTB
SDH/SONET Digital Trunk
1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTA card.
Fusion Link with FCCH
Fusion
Node-A
FCH
SDTA

Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration
SDTA

FCH

S D T B
SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

Internal LAN

Internal LAN

Fusion Link without FCCH


Fusion
Node-A
SDTA

Node-B Fiber Optic Cable Connection Trunk (Speech Path)


SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

S D T B
SDTA

Fiber Optic Cable For Dual Configuration

Internal LAN

Trunk * ) SDT: SDH/SONET DigitalHandler FCH: Fusion Call Control


Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System CHAPTER 3 Page 448 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

Mounting conditions are shown below. Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables. For single configuration: For dual configuration: SDT CABLEB <S> SDT CABLEA <D>

This card is connected to the TSW card. Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 449 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in the figure in Figure 3-131.

OPE MB
2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0 ACT1 SYC0A SYC1A SYC0B SYC1B

PCM I/O MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B

Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)

CHAPTER 3 Page 450 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

LAMP NAME OPE

COLOR Green Red

STATE Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation. Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation. Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal. Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal. Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally. Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state. Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally. Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0

Red Red Red Red Green Off Green

ACT1 Off Green SYC0A Off Green SYC1A Off Green SYC0B Off Green SYC1B Off Note:

A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT2/3.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 451 Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

SWITCH NAME MB

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card Make-busy

MEANING

Circuit card Make-busy cancel

6.

External Interface Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON

SWITCH NAME MB

CHAPTER 3 Page 452 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

PA-2CCHA
Common Channel Handler
1. General Function Equipped with two circuits of Common Channel Handlers (CCHs), the PA-2CCH A circuit card provides two signaling links for a digital/analog Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system, which can be selected by key settings on this card. If a digital CCIS system, this card is connected to a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) card with a flat cable to exchange common channel signals as illustrated below. To support an analog CCIS system, this card also has an RS-232c interface for Modem(s).

Digital CCIS

Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

CCH INT SW INT

Flat Cable 2-wire DTI 2-wire CCIS NETWORK

I/O Local Bus

Clock Extraction (For a PLO-SECONDARY switch)

CPU

System Clock

PLO

Analog CCIS (with MODEM) Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

CCH INT SW INT MODEM

Analog Tie Line CLK TLT

CCIS NETWORK

I/O Local Bus

CPU

: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM Signal) : Clock Signal

Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 453 Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. The DTI and CCH card, however, cannot coexist in the same Highway Block.

Mounting Module

PIM

The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in the following universal slots shown below. Note that this card cannot be mounted in slot 04.
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

When this card is mounted in slot No.4, the LENS data for the first circuit of the CCH card must be assigned as 000 000, which is rejected by the ATRK command.

Note

CHAPTER 3 Page 454 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-133.

SW14 OPE SW13 N-OPE MB DOPE0 DOPE1 SW11 SW01

SW12 SW10

SW02

TRK To "CN2" connector on CCT/DTI DCH/CCH To "TRK" connector on other DCH/CCH

Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE DOPE0 DOPE1

COLOR
Green Red Red Flash

STATE
Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the common channel signalling link is set up. Flashes when CCH is started up.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 455 Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME
MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING
ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING
Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel Not used Not used Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.
SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.0 CIRCUIT

SW01 0

ON OFF ON 1 OFF 2 3 OFF OFF ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

SW02

SW10 1
SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

64 32 16 8 64 32 16 8

kbps kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward)

CHAPTER 3 Page 456 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 4

SETTING ON OFF

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.1 CIRCUIT

SW10-5

SW10-6

SW10-7

TRANSFER SPEED

SW10

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

64 32 16 8 64 32 16 8

kbps kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps (Forward) kbps kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward) kbps (Backward)

ON 8 OFF SW11 (MODE0) SW12 (MODE1) Note: 0 0

Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit. Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.

Standard setting Standard setting

When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON. When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 457 Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

SWITCH NAME SW13 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW14 (for No. 1 Circuit)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

1
SW13-1/ SW14-1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT SW13-2/ SW14-2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON SW13-3/ SW14-3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW13-4/ SW14-4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON SW13-5/ SW14-5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON TIME SLOT NO. CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31

ON 6 OFF

Mode setting; No. 7 PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method) Mode setting; No. 7 CCIS
SETTING OF SPEED OF MODE

SW13-7/ SW14-7 OFF OFF

SW13-8/ SW14-8 OFF ON OFF ON

SPEED 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Inhibit

ON ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 458 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

6.

External Interface In analog CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on LT connectors as follows. See also Connecting Route Diagram for Digital/Analog CCIS.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 SG 0 27 RT 0 28 RS 0 29 30 SG 1 31 32 RT 1 33 RS 1 34 SCKB 0 35 TDB 0 36 RDB 0 37 38 SCKB 1 39 TDB 1 40 RDB 1 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1

SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1

RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10HW11

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 459 Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 SG 0 35 36 RT 0 37 RS 0 38 39 SG 1 40 RT 1 41 RS 1 42 SCKB 0 43 TDB 0 44 RDB 0 45 46 SCKB 1 47 TDB 1 48 RDB 1 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3

RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1 SCKA 0 TDA 0 RDA 0 SCKA 1 TDA 1 RDA 1

LT Connector Slot No.

LT0

LT1

LT2

LT4

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 460 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

Digital CCIS
MDF PBX TA DTI OUT TB RA IN RB POUTA POUTB CCH To PLO TA TB RA RB PCM CARRIER EQUIPMENT

CCH

CCH

CCH

DTI

TRK CN2
DCH/ CCH

CCH

Note DTI

FRONT VIEW

Note: A maximum of 7CCH cards can be connected to a DTI card. CCH Multiple Connection

TRK
DCH/ CCH

TRK
DCH/ CCH

Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS)

TRK
DCH/ CCH

TRK CN2
DCH/ CCH

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 461 Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

Analog CCIS (with MODEM)


15-m (50-foot) cable limit PBX MDF RD CCH SG ER RT ST2 RS SD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD <Available MODEM> synchronous 2400, 4800, 9600 bps 4-wire Full Duplex RD MODEM

Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS)

CHAPTER 3 Page 462 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2CCHA Common Channel Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE PIM

SW01

3 2 1 0 ON

SW01-2 and 3: Not used

SW02

3 2 1 0 ON ON 12345678

SW10

SW11

Standard Setting

SW12

Standard Setting

ON

12345678

SW13

ON

12345678

SW14

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 463 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

PA-24CCTA
Common Channel Trunk
1. General Function The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at 1.5 M bit/s. Being equipped with a Common Channel Handler (CCH), which can be allocated to a desired channel among the existing 24 channels by key setting and programming, this card can be used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key setting and programming.

Common Channel Signaling Link Built-in Common Channel Handler (x1)

INT

TSW

INT

CCH

T R

CCIS NETWORK

24CCT 1.544 MHz Clock Extraction (For PLO-secondary switch)

I/O Local Bus System Clock CPU

PLO

: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM Signal) : Clock Signal

Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 464 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) card can be mounted in the following universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

This card is mounted in the following shaded slots.


00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

This card cannot be mounted in Slot 05.

Note

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 465 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-138. Note that there are two types of PA-24 CCTA cards which differ in their face layouts.

SW6G SW4D SW5D SW6C SW11B SW39 SW13B


3 2 1 0

OPE N-OPE MB
PCM FRM BER RMT AIS DOPE LYR LB

MODE SW58 SW138 BL23

SW25

BL00 CN2 To "TRK" Connector on CCH/DCH

OPE N-OPE SW18 SW17 SW00 MB


PCM FRM BER RMT AIS DOPE LYR LB 3 2 1 0

SW01

SW02 SW19 BL23

SW13 SW12 SW11 BL00 SW10 CN2 To "TRK" Connector on CCH/DCH

SW15

SW14

Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT)

CHAPTER 3 Page 466 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in Table 3-9.

Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS D-OPE LYR LB COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Green Green Green BL00 Flash OFF BL23 STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when an input signal is down (PCM LOSS). Lights when a frame alignment loss is detected. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multi frame and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Remains lit while Common Channel Handler (CCH) block is active. Remains lit while CCIS signal link is set up. Remains lit while the CCIS signal is being looped back. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses) or corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM) Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 467 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make busy

SW00/MB DOWN ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF SW01/13B ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

Circuit card make busy cancel


SW01/SW13B 0 3 Internal Loopback CCH Control MBR CCH Loopback

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

SW01/SW13B 1 2 External Payload All Circuit Loopback Loopback MBR

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

Note:

For more information on loopback, see below.

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card.
Payload Loopback External Loopback (Line Loopback)

PA-24CCTA TSW Interface Line Interface R NETWORK T Speech Path Control Block

Framer

Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

Switch

Internal Loopback

PAD

CHAPTER 3 Page 468 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH NAME SW02/ MODE

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Transmission Guard Timer Setting (sec.)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

4 (sec.) 5 (sec.) 6 (sec.) 7 (sec.) 8 (sec.) 9 (sec.) 10 (sec.) 11 (sec.) 12 (sec.) 13 (sec.) 14 (sec.) 15 (sec.) 16 (sec.) 17 (sec.) 18 (sec.) 19 (sec.) Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Negative

SW10/4D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Positive Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Negative Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Coding Type: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Coding Type: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) Fixed to ON. When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 469 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk SWITCH NAME SW11/39 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance (feet)

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING PAD Control


SW11/39-1

MEANING

SW11/39-2

PAD Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

Bothway Receive only (Send 0dB) Send only (Receive 0dB) Fixed to ARTD command

Data PAD Control


SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

64 Kbps 56 Kbps 48 Kbps 64 Kbps INV

T Signal Control
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

R Signal Control
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 T Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

ON

Equalizer Setting
ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON Other Combinations 0 ~ 40 m 40 ~ 80 m 80 ~ 120 m 120 ~ 160 m 160 ~ 200 m Impossible

CHAPTER 3 Page 470 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW12/58

SWITCH NO.

SETTING
ON

STANDARD SETTING
PAD Pattern Selection

MEANING

4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW13/6C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW14/5D 1 OFF 2 ON OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON Netfusing : Not used Netfusing : Used Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER2 Signal Logic: Positive LAYER2 Signal Logic: Negative In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is: Not to be notified In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is: To be notified Zero Suppress: Not to be suppressed Zero Suppress: To be suppressed Fixed to all ON (Not used) Note:
SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF Other Combinations

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Impossible

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.


SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 MODE

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT Alarm

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 471 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW15/25

SWITCH NO.
1 2

SETTING
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING
Impedance Setting: 100 Impedance Setting: 110

MEANING

Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Ground Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Open Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Ground Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Open Idle Code Sending: To be sent out Idle Code Sending: Not to be sent out Common Channel Signal Transfer Speed Selection
SW17/6G-1 SW17/6G-2 SW17/6G-3 PAD Pattern

4 SW17/6G 1

OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

64 Kbps 32 Kbps (Forward) 16 Kbps (Forward) 8 Kbps (Forward) 64 Kbps 32 Kbps (Backward) 16 Kbps (Backward) 8 Kbps (Backward)

Signal Channel Designation


Signal Channel
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

4
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

5
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

SW17/6G 6
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

7
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

8
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 472 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW18/11B

SWITCH NO.
1 2 3 4

SETTING
ON ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

Fixed to all ON ON ON ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF


6

Selection of CCH: Built-in CCH Selection of CCH: External CCH (To be used together with PA-2CCHA card) Selection of Common Channel Signal Speed
SW18/11B 7 8 Transfer Speed

ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW19/138 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON Note: ON

OFF ON ON 56Kbps ON OFF ON As per SW17/6G-1 - 3 ON ON OFF 48Kbps Other Combinations Impossible

COP Alarm: Inhibited COP Alarm: Allowed Operating Mode Setting


SW19/138 2 3 Operating Mode

OFF OFF When No.7 CCIS is set ON OFF When No.7 CCIS PCR is set Note Other Not used Combinations

PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)

Fixed to ON

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 473 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24CCTA As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 ARTD
SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE

A Loss (Bothway)
SEND RECIEVE

A Loss (Receive)
SEND RECIEVE

A Loss (Bothway)
SEND RECIEVE

A Loss (Receive)
SEND RECIEVE

1 2 3 4 5 7

2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

-3 [dB]
Note

3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]

3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB]

Key settings of SW11/39-3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD Patterns) 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

Note:

- represents GAIN in this table.

CHAPTER 3 Page 474 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 E 27 28 RB 29 30 POUTB 31 32 33 TB 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

LT1

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10HW11

Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-141).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 475 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card is as follows.
MDF PBX Installation Cable 24CCT OUT TA TB RA IN RB POUTA POUTB PLO DIU1A DIU1B Note 2 1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1 TA TB RA RB CCIS NETWORK

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side. Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.


Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 476 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME SW00/MB

MODULE PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH SHAPE DOWN

REMARKS Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01/13B

3 2 1 0 ON

SW02 (MODE)

Standard Setting

24-multiframe CCT Standard


ON ON 12345678

12345678

SW10/4D 12-multiframe CCT Standard


ON 12345678

ON

12345678

SW11/39

ON

12345678

SW12/58

ON

12345678

SW13/6C

Fixed to all ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 477 Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA Common Channel Trunk

MODULE PIM

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS 24-multiframe CCT Standard


ON 1234

ON

1234

SW14/5D 12-multiframe CCT Standard


ON 1234

ON

SW15/25

1234

ON

12345678

SW17/6G

ON

12345678

SW18/11B

ON

1234

SW19/138

CHAPTER 3 Page 478 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

PA-2DCHA
D-Channel Handler
1. General Function This circuit card controls D channels of ISDN Line. This circuit card provides 2-circuit D-channel Handler (DCH).

TSW ISDN Terminal ILC 24DTI DSU

DCH Dterm DLC

LC

PLO

Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 479 Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.
Mounting Module PIM
06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00

01

02

03

04

05

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. This circuit card must be mounted in a slot on the left side of the slot in which DTI card is mounted. This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 04 of PIM0.

CHAPTER 3 Page 480 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-143.

SW14 SW13 OPE N-OPE MB SW12 SW10 SW11 SW01


DOPE0 DOPE1

SW02

Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE DOPE0 DOPE1

COLOR Green Red Green Flash

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the common channel signaling link is set up. Flashes when DCH is started up.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 481 Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Circuit card make busy

MB

DOWN ON 0 OFF ON

Circuit card make busy cancel No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel Not used Not used Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed. Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

SW01

1 2 3 0

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON

1 SW02 2

OFF ON OFF ON OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 482 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler


SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

1
SW10-1

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/ INSERT IN NO. 0 CIRCUIT SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

64 kbps 32 kbps (Forward) 16 kbps (Forward) 8 kbps (Forward) 64 kbps 32 kbps (Backward) 16 kbps (Backward) 8 kbps (Backward)

4 SW10 5

ON OFF

Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit.


SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/ INSERT IN NO. 1 CIRCUIT SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

64 kbps 32 kbps (Forward) 16 kbps (Forward) 8 kbps (Forward) 64 kbps 32 kbps (Backward) 16 kbps (Backward) 8 kbps (Backward)

8 SW11 (MODE0) SW12 (MODE1) Note:

ON OFF 1 5 1 5

Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit. Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit. AT & T Bell AT & T Communication AT & T Bell AT & T Communication

When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON. When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 483 Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT

SW13-1/ SW13-2/ SW13-3 SW13-4/ SW13-5/ SW14-1 SW14-2 SW14-3 SW14-4 SW14-5

TIME SLOT NO.

3 SW13 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW14 (for No. 1 Circuit) 4

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH29 CH30 CH31

ON OFF

D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side D Channel Mode Selection; User Side
SETTING OF SPEED MODE

SW13-7/SW14-7

SW13-8/SW14-8

SPEED

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON

2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps Inhibit

CHAPTER 3 Page 484 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-144.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 1 SCKA 0 2 TDA 0 3 RDA 0 4 5 SCKA 1 6 TDA 1 7 RDA 1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1 SCKB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCKB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1 RD 0 1 2 ER 0 ST2 0 3 4 SD 0 RD 1 5 ER 1 6 ST2 1 7 SD 1 8 9 SCKA 0 10 TDA 0 11 RDA 0 12 13 SCKA 1 14 TDA 1 15 RDA 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1

RD 0 ER 0 ST2 0 SD 0 RD 1 ER 1 ST2 1 SD 1

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT5

LT7

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 485 Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 RD 0 10 ER 0 11 ST2 0 12 SD 0 13 RD 1 14 ER 1 15 ST2 1 16 SD 1 17 SCKA 0 18 TDA 0 19 RDA 0 20 21 SCKA 1 22 TDA 1 23 RDA 1 24 25 LT3 LT4 LT5 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11

SG 0 RT 0 RS 0 SG 1 RT 1 RS 1 SCLB 0 TDB 0 RDB 0 SCLB 1 TDB 1 RDB 1

LT Connector Slot No.

LT0

LT1

LT2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 486 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

When modem is not used

MDF NEAX2400 IPX

DTI

DSU

DCH

Front Cable connection DCH DTI/CCT

TRK CN2

Front

Note:

For cross connections between DTI and D-channel common channel signalling line, refer to the explanations of 24DTI circuit card.
Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 487 Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

When modem is used

MDF NEAX2400 IPX

DCH

RD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD

RD SG ER RT ST2 RS SD

MODEM

Cable length is maximum 15 meters (50 feet). The modem to be used is a synchronous modem of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps, and the communication method is limited to 4-wire full duplex communications.

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 488 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-2DCHA D-Channel Handler

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE

SW01

3 2 1 0 ON

SW01-2, 3 : Not used

SW02

3 2 1 0 ON

SW10

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

PIM SW11

1 : AT & T Bell 5 : AT & T Communication

SW12

1 : AT & T Bell 5 : AT & T Communication

SW13

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW14

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 489 Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-ILCG
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function This circuit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunction with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A to provide H11 terminal (1.536 Mbps) with D-channel signal. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminal (64 Kbps), incidentally, cannot be connected to this circuit card.

TSW PRT

ILC

H11 Terminal/ Terminal Adapter PRT

ISDN NETWORK

PA-24DTR/ PA-24PRTB-A

Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 490 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-ILCG (ILC) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch B-ch

Mounting Condition

Mounting conditions for this circuit card are as follows: 1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23. 2. Mount this circuit card so that its leads and the leads of any other analog line/trunk circuit card may not come out to the same LT cable. 3. This circuit card is not used in even-number module group (MG), unit (U)=0 and group (G)=0. 4. When registering this circuit card in the shaded slots, user must assign B-channels to odd-number group (G) and D-channel to even-number group(G). 5. Do not mount other line/trunk card in just right side of the slot where a PA-ILCG card is mounted.

D-ch

D-ch

D-ch

D-ch

D-ch

D-ch

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 491 Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps and Switches The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 3-147.

SW06
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OPE N-OPE MB KEY

BL42 BL41 LYR4 PWR4

PKT MODE 0 SW01


1 2 3 4 1

SW04
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1

SW05
2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MODE 1

Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC)

CHAPTER 3 Page 492 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE BL42 COLOR Green Red Green Flash (60IPM) OFF Green Flash (60IPM) OFF Green Flash (120IPM) OFF PWR4 PKT Red Green OFF STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights green when B2-channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Lights green when B1-channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Remains lit while Layer 2 of the corresponding channel is active. Flashes while Layer 1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established. Layer 1 and/or Layer 2 have not been established. Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited. Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation. Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

BL41

LYR4

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 493 Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make-busy

MEANING

Circuit card make-busy cancel

1 SW01 2 3 4 1 2 3 SW04 4 5 6 7 8

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

Fixed to ON Fixed to ON Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Fixed to ON (Wiring Mode) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON)
PAD Value Selection

1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 SW05 OFF ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF ON OFF ON

SW05-1 SW05-2

Receiving Pad

Sending Pad

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON

0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

0 dB 2 dB 5 dB 8 dB

Length of Call Reference Value Selection SW05-3 SW05-4 Length of Call Reference Value

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate ON Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate OFF Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate ON Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate

Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) D-channel Packet Service: Available D-channel Packet Service: Not available

Not used (Fixed to ON)

CHAPTER 3 Page 494 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW06 5 6 7 8 MODE 0 1~F 0~5 MODE 1 6 7~F Note: ON ON ON ON 0 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON ON ON ON

MEANING Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Data link mode for Layer 2: Point-to-Point (P-P) (Fixed to ON) Note Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Not used (Fixed to ON) Fixed to 0 Not used Not used

Fixed to 6 Not used

The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) used in this table have no relation to the actual wiring configuration.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 495 Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-148.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 3, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 RB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 RA TA 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 7 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 6 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

RB TB

RA TA

RB TB

RA TA

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10HW11

Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-149).

CHAPTER 3 Page 496 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

MDF PBX

ILC

RA RB TA TB

TA TB RA RB TA TB RA RB

Modular Rosette MJ-8SR ISDN Terminal

24DTR/ 24PRTB-A

RA RB TA TB

Modular Rosette MJ-8S H11 Terminal/ Terminal Adapter

Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 497 Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
ON

REMARKS

MB

ON

SW01

1 2 3 4

ON

SW04

12345678

ON

SW05

12345678

ON

SW06

12345678

MODE 0

MODE 1

CHAPTER 3 Page 498 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

PA-4ILCH
ISDN Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-4ILCH is a line circuit card which accommodates ISDN Terminal via NT1. The main features of this circuit card are shown below: A maximum of four Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals can be accommodated. This card and NT1 are connected using 2-wire U Interface. Sealing current (Maximum 15mA) can be supplied for keeping cables from rusting.

TSW PA-4ILCH NT1 TE I.430 ANSI T1.601

PLO

Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 499 Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4ILCH (4ILC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 500 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-151.

OPE NOPE MB
BL32 BL31 LYR3 BER3 BL22 BL21 LYR2 BER2 BL12 BL11 LYR1 BER1 BL02 BL01 LYR0 BER0

SW12

SW11 MBR SW20 LPB


L3 L2 L1 L0 L3 L2 L1 L0

SW10

MODE

MONITOR (Not used) SW21

Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 501 Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indication on this circuit card are shown below.

LAMP NAME OPE NOPE BLn2 n=0~3

COLOR Green Red Green Flashing Off Green

MEANING Lights when the card is in normal operation. Lights when the card is in make-busy state. Lights when B2 channel of line #n is communicating. Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM). During idle state. Lights when B1 channel of the line #n is communicating. Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM). During idle state. Lights when layer 2 link of the line #n is established. Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of S Reference Point (60 IPM). Note Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of U Reference Point (120 IPM). Note Synchronization is not established on either Layer 1 or Layer 2. Two or more CRC errors occur per second and the condition lasts for 10 seconds. One or no CRC error occurs per second.

BLn1 n=0~3

Flashing Off Green

LYRn n=0~3

Flashing

Off BERn n=0~3 Note: Red Off

Establishment of synchronization on U Reference Point may require 30 seconds or more.

CHAPTER 3 Page 502 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Switches on this card have the following meanings.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN ON

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Line 0 make busy request Line 0 make busy request cancel Line 1 make busy request Line 1 make busy request cancel Line 2 make busy request Line 2 make busy request cancel Line 3 make busy request Line 3 make busy request cancel Loop back is set on NT1 for line 0. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 0. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 1. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 1. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 2. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 2. Loop back is set on NT1 for line 3. Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 3. Not used Fixed Not used Fixed D-channel Packet Service Available D-channel Packet Service Not Available Fixed Fixed

OFF ON

1 MBR 2

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

1 LPB 2

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF 0-2

MODE

3 4-F 1 2 ON ON OFF 3 4 ON ON

SW10

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 503 Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW11 5 6 7 8 STANDARD SETTING

SETTING ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
SW1

MEANING Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Sealing Current is not supplied.


SW2

Sealing Current is supplied. PAD Control (TSW Side PAD Value) Note
SW3 TSW Side PAD Value

1~3

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

SW12

OFF ON

Not used PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-5dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-3dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB Not used PAD2=0dB, PAD1=5dB (Standard Setting) PAD2=0dB, PAD1=3dB PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB

4 5 6 7 8 Note:

ON ON ON ON ON

Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

PAD control is shown below.

PAD1 TSW Side PAD2 Line Side

CHAPTER 3 Page 504 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0: Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1: Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2 Point-to-Point (P-P) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3: Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3: Point-to-Point (P-P) On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated. On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis. On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

1 OFF ON 2 SW20 Note 1 Note 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON SW21 Note 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF 5 6 7 8 ON ON ON ON OFF ON

Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

Note 1: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) and Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) used in this table have no relation to the

actual wiring configuration.


Note 2: This switch must be set according to the specification of the ISDN terminal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 505 Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

6.

External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-152.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 B0 B1 B2 B3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT5 LT6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 B1 B2 B3

A0 A1 A2 A3

B0 B1 B2 B3

A0 A1 A2 A3

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PWR

PWR

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation CHAPTER 3 Page 506 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

MDF PIM

ILC

A B

A B

NT1

Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 507 Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH ISDN Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE

ON

MB

UP: Circuit card make busy DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

OFF

MBR

No. No. No. No.

3 2 1 0 ON

OFF

LPB

No. No. No. No.

3 2 1 0 ON

MODE PIM
ON

SW10

12 34

ON

SW11

12 34 567 8

ON

SW12

123 4 56 78

ON

SW20

1234

ON

SW21

1 234 56 78

CHAPTER 3 Page 508 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-8ILCE-A
ISDN Terminal Line Circuit
1. General Function The PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card provides an interface between the system and a maximum of eight ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminals, allowing the system to use eight ISDN BRIs, which are made up of two B channels at 64 kbps and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D 8), on the same bus. In addition, this card supports D channel packet function. For this feature, however, available channels are seven channels, ranging from No. 0 to No. 6.

SW PRT ILC (MAX. 8 circuits) PRT ILC (MAX. 8 terminals)

ISDN NETWORK

Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 509 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8ILCE-A card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

The circuit card cannot be mounted in slot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group.

Note

CHAPTER 3 Page 510 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on the circuit card is shown in Figure 3-155.

SW02

SW03

SW06
CH #7

OPE N-OPE MB
BL72 LYR7 BL62 LYR6 BL52 LYR5 BL42 LYR4 BL32 LYR3 BL22 LYR2 BL12 LYR1 BL02 LYR0 BL71 PWR7 BL61 PWR6 BL51 PWR5 BL41 PWR4 BL31 PWR3 BL21 PWR2 BL11 PWR1 BL01 PWR0

CH #6

CH #5

CH #4 BL02 BL01 LYR0 PWR0 CH #2 CH #1

CH #3

CH #0

SW00

SW01

SW04 SW05

PKT MODE0 MODE1

Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 511 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on the circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME
OPE N-OPE

COLOR
Green Red Green

DESCRIPTION
Remains lit while the circuit card is operating. Remains lit while the circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights green when B1 channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Lights green when B2 channel is being accessed and in operation. The corresponding channel is in make-busy state. The corresponding channel is idle. Remains lit while Layer2 of the corresponding channel is active. Note Flashes while Layer1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established. Layer1 and/or Layer2 have not been established. Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited. Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation. Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

BL n1 (n=0-7)

Flash (60IPM) OFF Green

BL n2 (n=0-7)

Flash (60IPM) OFF Green

LYR n (n=0-7)

Flash (120IPM) OFF

PWR n (n=0-7) PKT

Red Green OFF

Note:

Depending on the type of the connected ISDN terminal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp may flash when the terminal is idle and lights green at the time of call set-up.

CHAPTER 3 Page 512 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on the circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING
ON OFF 1 SW00 2 3 4 1 SW01 2 3 4 1 SW02 2 3 4 1 SW03 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SW04 Note 5 6 7 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

SWITCH
MB

MEANING
Make busy of the circuit card.

Normal setting

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

Fixed to all ON.

Circuit #0: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #0: Short Passive Connection Circuit #1: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #1: Short Passive Connection Circuit #2: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #2: Short Passive Connection Circuit #3: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #3: Short Passive Connection Circuit #4: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #4: Short Passive Connection Circuit #5: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #5: Short Passive Connection Circuit #6: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #6: Short Passive Connection Circuit #7: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection Circuit #7: Short Passive Connection

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 513 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Note:

Set the SW04 to determine the 4-wire bus mode referring to the following.
ON Point-to-Point mode: In this mode one Terminal Equipment (TE) can be connected at the end of up to a maximum of 600 m of cable as shown below.
Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100)) max 600 m (in the case of 0.5 [mm])

ILC

TE

Extended Passive Bus mode: This mode is a point-to-multipoint mode, in which up to eight terminals can be connected. Note that the terminals must be connected within 50 m from the end of the bus cables as shown below.

ILC Modular Rossete TE max 50m max 400m (in the case of 0 .5 [mm]) TE Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100))

OFF Short Passive Bus mode: This mode is also a point-to-multipoint mode, in which a maximum of eight terminals can be connected anywhere on the bus. Note that the bus length is limited to 200 m in this case.
ILC Modular Rossete TE Terminals can be connected any location on the bus. max 200 m (in the case of 0.5 [mm]) TE Modular Rossete (with terminating resistor (100))

CHAPTER 3 Page 514 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

SWITCH

SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING


ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF PAD Level Adjustment:

MEANING

SW1

SW2

RECEIVE (dB)

SEND (dB)

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON

0 0 0 0

0 2 5 8

SW05

3 4 5 6 7

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Fixed to OFF. Fixed to OFF. Not used Not used Packet Access via D channel: In Service Packet Access via D channel: Out of Service

8 1

ON ON OFF ON

Fixed to ON. Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Multipoint Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Point Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Multipoint

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW06 Note 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note: OFF ON

Adjust each key according to the specification of each ISDN terminal.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 515 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

SWITCH

SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING 0

MEANING Fixed to 0.

MODE0

1 Not used F 0 Not used 5

MODE1

6 7

Fixed to 6.

Not used F

CHAPTER 3 Page 516 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7

RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-157)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 517 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 RB4 TB4 RB5 TB5 RB6 TB6 RB7 TB7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 TA4 RA5 TA5 RA6 TA6 RA7 TA7

RB0 TB0 RB1 TB1 RB2 TB2 RB3 TB3

RA0 TA0 RA1 TA1 RA2 TA2 RA3 TA3

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

CHAPTER 3 Page 518 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Point-to-Point
MDF

ILC

RA RB TA TB

TA TB RA RB

Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100)

TE

Point-to-Multipoint
MDF

ILC

RA RB TA TB

TA TB RA RB Modular Rossete Modular Rossete with terminating resistor (100)

TE

TE

TA TB RA RB

RA RB TA TA

RA RB TA TA

Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 519 Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB

ON

1234

SW00

ON

1234

SW01

ON

1234

SW02

ON

1234

SW03 PIM
ON 12345678

SW04

ON

12345678

SW05

ON

12345678

SW06

MODE0

MODE1

CHAPTER 3 Page 520 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATA
Digital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function The PA-4DATA (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant, Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in one of the following three modes. 16-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card) 32-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card) 60-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set (See the Reference). In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source.

This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

TSW INCOMING CALL COT DAT COT ATI INCOMING CALL CALLING PARTY PUBLIC NETWORK CALLING PARTY

ATTCON (Busy)

CPU

GT

Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 521 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4DATA (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 522 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-159.

SW5 SW7 (SW12)

WR OPE N-OPE (SW11) MB BL7 (G) BL4 (G) BL3 (R)


3 2 1 0

SW6

BL0 (R) MBRQ MRCS START JACK

(SW10) (SW9) (SW8)

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP OPE N-OPE BL4 BL7 BL0 BL3

COLOR Green Red Green Flash Red Flash

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source. Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit). Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 523 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

SWITCH

SETTING UP

MEANING

MB (SW11) DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel


SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)

1 SW1 (for No. 0 Circuit) SW2 (for No. 1 Circuit) SW3 (for No. 2 Circuit) SW4 (for No. 3 Circuit) 4 2

ON ON OFF

ON ON OFF

OFF ON OFF

ON OFF OFF

16-sec. mode 32-sec. mode 60-sec. mode

Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits 3

32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits 60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit


Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 - SW4 must be set in

the same way (Two different modes cannot be mixed assigned.).

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

SW5-1

SW5-2

RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

OFF ON OFF

ON OFF OFF

16-sec. Recording/Playback 32-sec. Recording/Playback 60-sec. Recording/Playback

SW5

Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as set

by SW1-SW4.
3 Note 4 4 OFF When using as announcement equipment only ON OFF ON

Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law When using as an external music-on-hold source

Note 4: Valid in the case of recording or playback from a telephone set.

CHAPTER 3 Page 524 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Single playback by No. 0 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 0 Circuit Single playback by No. 1 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 1 Circuit Single playback by No. 2 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 2 Circuit Single playback by No. 3 Circuit Note 5 Multiple playback by No. 3 Circuit

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW6 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

Fixed Fixed Not used Recording from a telephone set Normal setting

Note 5: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback

(ON).
1 2 SW7 3 4 OFF OFF UP START (SW8) DOWN OFF OFF

Fixed Fixed Not used Not used Setting for recording start from a tape recorder or for playback start.

Normal setting

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 525 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH NO.

SETTING
E 0 1 2

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
Set to E while the circuit card is using as announcement equipment only. Designation of No. 0 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 1 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 2 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 3 Circuit. The timer is 16-sec. mode. Designation of No. 0 and No. 1 Circuit. The timer is 32-sec. mode. Designation of No. 2 and No. 3 Circuit. The timer is 32-sec. mode. Designation of All Circuits. The timer is 60-sec. mode. Recording from a telephone set. No. 0 Circuit make busy request No. 0 Circuit is designated during a recording.

MRCS (SW9) Note 6

3 4 5 6 F ON 0 OFF ON 1

No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 1 Circuit make busy request No. 1 Circuit is designated during a recording.

MBRQ (SW10) 2

OFF ON OFF ON 3 OFF

No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 2 Circuit make busy request No. 2 Circuit is designated during a recording.

No. 2 Circuit make busy request cancel No. 3 Circuit make busy request No. 3 Circuit is designated during a recording.

No. 3 Circuit make busy request cancel Recording from a tape recorder (WRITE mode) Normal setting

WR (SW12)

UP DOWN

Note 6: When this circuit card is using an external music-on-hold source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.

CHAPTER 3 Page 526 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

6.

External Interface When this circuit card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following leads (FM, E) appear from the LT connector.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 FM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 LT7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

FM

FM

LT2

LT5

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 527 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference] How to Record a Message Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) SWITCH SW1 SETTING
ON

DESCRIPTION

1234

Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 60 sec.


1234 1234 WR OPE N-OPE

SW4 Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec. A-law/-law: -law External Music Source/Announcement Equipment: Announcement Equipment Single/Repeated Playback: Repeated Playback

SW5

SW7

MB BL7

ON

SW5

1234

12 3456 78 BL0 SW6


3 2 1 0

MBRQ MRCS START

SW6

ON12345678

JACK 1234 1234 1234 1234 BATTERY PACK

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

MRCS

Channel Designation: 60 sec. mode

Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

Front DAT Tape Recorder

Jack Earphone Jack (3.6 )

Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded. (To record a message in the 60 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)

Turn the WR key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder is connected to the circuit.)

Turn the START key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)

CHAPTER 3 Page 528 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel. - recording -

The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.) Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

How to Play Back the Recorded Message Playback from a telephone set Set the related switches on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card. Seize a specific channel by Individual Trunk Access. Hear the recorded message.

Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATA (DAT) card Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card. Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch. Turn the START key upwards. Hear the recorded message.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 529 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA Digital Announcement Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE
ON 1234

MODULE

REMARKS

SW1

ON

1234

SW2

ON

1234

SW3

ON

1234

SW4

ON

1234

SW5

ON

12345678

SW6 PIM
ON 1234

SW7

START (SW8)

ON

MRCS (SW9)
ON

MBREQ (SW10)

3 2 1 0

WE (SW12) MB DOWN

ON

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3 Page 530 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATB
Digital Announcement Trunk
1. General Function The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant, Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in one of the following three modes. 64-sec. 128-sec. 240-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card) mode (maximum 2 CHs/card) mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. (See the Reference). In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source. This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.
We are sorry, the line is busy now. Please stay on the line for a while.
(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

TSW INCOMING CALL COT DAT COT ATI INCOMING CALL CALLING PARTY PUBLIC NETWORK CALLING PARTY

ATTCON (Busy)

CPU

GT

Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 531 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 532 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-162.

WR

OPE N-OPE MB

SW5 SW3 SW6 SW1

BL7 BL0

SW7 SW2

3 2 1 0

MBRQ MRCS START JACK

SW4 JP0

Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP OPE N-OPE BL4 BL7 BL0 BL3

COLOR Green Red Green Flash Red Flash

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a recording source. Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through No. 3 circuit) Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state or has not been assigned in the system.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 533 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

SWITCH MB

SETTING UP DOWN

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Make busy request on a channel basis (Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)

MBRQ 1-4

ON OFF

Make busy request cancel on a channel basis


Setting of Recording Mode

MRCS

0 1
SWITCH NO. Mode Channel

2 3 4 5 6 7 SW1 SW4 Each Switch corresponds to each channel of DAT: channel SW1: channel #0 SW2: channel #1 SW3: channel #2 SW4: channel #3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

64-sec. mode

128-sec. mode 240-sec. mode

0 1 2 3 0, 1 2, 3 0, 1, 2, 3

SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT 1 2 3 4 TIMER (MODE)

ON ON OFF ON

ON ON OFF ON

OFF ON OFF ON

ON OFF OFF ON

64-sec. mode 128-sec. mode 240-sec. mode Not available

CHAPTER 3 Page 534 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

OFF ON OFF

ON OFF OFF

64-sec. Recording/Playback 128-sec. Recording/Playback 240-sec. Recording/Playback

SW5

Note 1: Setting

of Recording/Playback Timer should correspond to that of SW1-SW4.

ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 SW6 5 OFF 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law To be used as external hold tone source To be used as announcement equipment Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 0 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 1 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No. 2 channel Note 2 Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 3 Multiple playback of No.3 channel Note 2 RAM Test data-clear

RAM Test data-store Not used Not used Not used

Note 2: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~ 6-4 should be set OFF. Note 3: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 535 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH SW7

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING Activation of RAM Test

MEANING

Normal Setting Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON. Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON. Not used Not used For Recording from the phone jack Normal setting When starting recording from the phone jack or playback. Normal setting

2 OFF 3 4 WR OFF OFF UP DOWN START UP DOWN

Table 3-13 Jumper Setting SWITCH JP0 SWITCH SHAPE SETTING LEFT RIGHT Compression Law: -law Compression Law: A-law DESCRIPTION

LEFT

RIGHT

CHAPTER 3 Page 536 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

6.

External Interface When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 LT4 FM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 LT7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

FM

FM

LT5

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 537 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference] HOW TO RECORD A MESSAGE Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.
Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) SWITCH SW1 SETTING
ON

DESCRIPTION

1234

Timer Value for Channel 0-3 240 sec.

SW4 Circuit Card Timer: 240 sec. A-law/-law: -law External Music Source/Announcement Equipment: Announcement Equipment Single/Repeated Playback: Repeated Playback
1234 WR 1234 1234 OPE N-OPE MB 12 3456 78 SW5 1234 SW3 BL7

SW5

ON

1234

BL0 SW6 1234 SW1 1234


3 2 1 0

MBRQ MRCS

SW6

ON12345678

SW7

SW2 START JACK

MRCS

Channel Designation: 240 sec. mode


JP0

SW4

BATTERY PACK

JP0
LEFT

A-law/-law: -law

Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

Front (DAT) jack earphone jack (3.6 )

Tape Recorder

Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded. (To record a message in the 240 sec mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.) Turn the WR key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the circuit.) Turn the START key upwards. (The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)
NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 538 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel. - recording -

The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 - BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.) Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

HOW TO PLAY BACK THE RECORDED MESSAGE

Playback from a telephone set Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card. Seize a specific channel by Individual Trunk Access. Hear the recorded message.

Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card. Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch. Turn the START key upwards. Hear the recorded message.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 539 Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB Digital Announcement Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME MB SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE

REMARKS

ON

START

ON

WR

MBRQ

3 2 1 0

MRCS

1234

SW1

1234

SW2

1234

SW3

1234

SW4

1234

SW5

12345678

SW6

SW7

1234

JP0
LEFT RIGHT

CHAPTER 3 Page 540 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

PH-M16
Line Test
1. General Function This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscribers line. The circuit card supports to send howler tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.
Note:

A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of line available the line test/automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.

TEL

LC TSW M U X

TEL

LC

PIM LPRA

TEST EQ

LTST
EXTENDED I/O BUS EXTENDED I/O BUS

GT

CPU

Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 541 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below.

Note:

This circuit card is used for 1-IMG System.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

LPM

CHAPTER 3 Page 542 Revision 1.0

PH-M16

PH-M16

PH-M16
NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-165.

OPE/MB MB

SW0

CRIN

Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Note:

CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 543 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

4.

Lamp Indications The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.
LAMP NAME OPE/MB Red This circuit card is make-busy.

COLOR Green This circuit card is operating.

DESCRIPTION

5.

Switch Settings The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard setting, it is indicated with X in the table below.
SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH

SETTING UP

MEANING Circuit card make-busy. Circuit card make-busy cancel

MB DOWN 1 2 3 OFF ON 4 OFF Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT (Set soft control only)
BASIC INTERVAL TIMER SW0 5 6 7 8 TIME

ON ON ON

Setting of a condition of DT detection (440Hz+350Hz) Setting of a condition of RBT detection (440Hz+480Hz) Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msc.)

Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.) Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone to ODT (Set soft control or E-wire loop back)

SW0
5

ON ON ON ON

OFF ON ON ON

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF OFF OFF ON

8 16 32 64

CHAPTER 3 Page 544 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

6.

External Interface

MISC Connector Accommodation


Circuit Card Backboard Connector Connector Name Slot Number

00 01 02 03 04

(PH-M16) PH-M16 PH-M16 Circuit Card Backboard Connector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC CABLE MISC CONNECTOR
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TE BELL0B BELL1B TELB LCB THOWB THOWS SE ATB OUTB TB1 BELL EXMJ MJ0B MN0B MJ1B MN1B INB 1 TM 2 BELL0A 3 BELL1A TELA 4 LCA 5 6 THOWA ONHK 7 TCR 8 ATM 9 ATA 10 11 OUTA TA1 12 13 14 EXMN MJ0A 15 16 MN0A MJ1A 17 18 MN1A INA 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

LPM

LPM Backboard MISC

Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 545 Revision 1.0

PH-M16 Line Test

PBX

MDF

LTST

TM TE OUTA OUTB INA INB TA1 TB1 E M RA RB TA TB A B

ODT

LC

Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 546 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PH-M16 Line Test

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE
ON(MB)

SWITCH NAME

REMARKS

MB
OFF ON 12345678

SW0

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 547 Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

PA-4AMPC
AMP Pool Trunk
1. General Function This circuit card is bidirectional amplifier circuitry to be used for such a purpose as level guaranteeing in a public linetie line connection. The circuit card is provided with four bidirectional amplifier circuits and controls gains to speech loss which may vary with the kind of line involved in the connection. Also, this circuit card is provided with the function to disable the AGC when modem signals such as FAX signals have arrived.

TSW Public N.W C.O. Trunk

Fix AMP ECb Echo Canceller which suppresses echo in the hybrid circuit of a C.O. trunk. Echo Canceller which suppresses echo ECb: in the tie-line side. Automatic Gain Control circuit (amplifies AGC: voice signals arriving from the public network.) FixAMP: Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies voice signals arriving from the tie-line network.) PAD: Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies voice signals arriving from the public network) ECa: ECa AGC PAD PA-4AMPC

Tie Line N.W

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 548 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 549 Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-169.

OPE

SW00 SW11

MB BL3 BL0 MB3

SW10

SW12 SW01

MB0

SW02

SW03 SW04

Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP)

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR

STATE

OPE BL0

Green Green Flash OFF

Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy. BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is in idle state.

BL3

CHAPTER 3 Page 550 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

SW00
(MB)

UP DOWN 0 ON OFF 1 ON OFF 2 ON OFF 3 1 2 3 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 4

Circuit card make busy

Circuit card make busy cancel The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. The corresponding circuit is in make busy state. Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled. Fixed Fixed Fixed Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. (When this switch has been set to ON, set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to right side.)

SW01

SW02 OFF

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. (When this switch has been set to OFF, set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to left side.) Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

5 6 7 8

OFF OFF OFF OFF

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 551 Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO.

SETTING

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

When this card works as AGC:


SW03-1 SW03-2 SETTING OF FIXED GAIN OF FIX AMP

SW03 SW04

ON OFF ON OFF
SW03-3

ON ON OFF OFF
SW03-4

0 dB (Standard) 4 dB 8 dB 12 dB
SETTING OF GAIN OF BY AGC

ON OFF ON

ON ON OFF

0dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -15dBm0 are adjusted to -15dBm0] (Standard) +4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -11dBm0 are adjusted to -11dBm0] -4dBr [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -19dBm0 are adjusted to -19dBm0] When this card does not work as AGC:

SW04 is set to all ON.


Amplification of voice from the public network Amplification of voice from the tie-line network

0 dB

4 dB

8 dB

12 dB

SW03 0 dB SW04 SW03 4 dB SW04 SW03 8 dB SW04 SW03 12 dB SW04

ON

SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04

ON

SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04

ON

SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04 SW03 SW04

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Right (SIG) SW10 Left (CAS) Right (SIG) SW11 Left (CAS) Right (SIG) SW12 Left (CAS)

Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. Only ECa (Public Line) side operates. Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate. Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

CHAPTER 3 Page 552 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-4AMPC AMP Pool Trunk

6.

Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE

SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME

SWITCH SHAPE
3 2 1 0

REMARKS

PIM

SW01

Make busy switch of the corresponding circuit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circuits) ON : Make busy of each circuit OFF : Make busy cancel of each circuit
ON

SW02

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

SW03

ON

12 3 4

SW04

ON

12 3 4

SW04

Left

Right

SW11

Left

Right

SW12

Left

Right

SW00 (MB)

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 553 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

PA-8TLTR
Tie Line Trunk
1. General Function The PA-8TLTR(TLT) circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among the following four types by key setting on a 4-channel basis. Loop Dialing (LD) Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 2-wire E & M 4-wire E & M

In addition, programmable PADs, whose value can be adjusted by key setting, are equipped with a 4-wire E & M interface. Note that a cable, which is connected to the ODT connector on the front edge of this card, is necessary when circuits #4 through #7 are used as 2-wire/4-wire E & M trunks. A typical example of channel allocation is illustrated in Figure 3-170.

INT

SW

INT

PA-8TLTR ODT #0
circuit #0

MDF 2W/4W Carrier Equipment PRIVATE NETWORK

LC Terminal

ODT #3 DID #0

circuit #3 circuit #4

LC Terminal DID #3

circuit #7

PUBLIC NETWORK

I/O Local Bus CPU GT

Note:

This diagram shows an example when the PA-8TLTR is used as four 2W/4W E&M and four DID trunks. In this instance, a flat cable connection is not required.
Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 554 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

2.

Mounting Location / Condition The PA-8TLTR (TLT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 555 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-171.

OPE

MB BL7 BL0 MB7 MB0

SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

ODT

Note

Note:

This connector is used when E & M is selected for circuits #4 through #7.
Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE BL0

COLOR Green Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or while DP signals are being received (flashes to the dial pulses) Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BL7

CHAPTER 3 Page 556 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
SWITCH SETTING NO. UP DOWN ON 0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

SWITCH MB (SW00) MB0 - 7 (SW01)

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Make busy of the No. 0 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 0 circuit Make busy of the No. 1 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 1 circuit Make busy of the No. 2 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 2 circuit Make busy of the No. 3 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 3 circuit Make busy of the No. 4 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 4 circuit Make busy of the No. 5 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 5 circuit Make busy of the No. 6 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 6 circuit Make busy of the No. 7 circuit Make busy cancel of the No. 7 circuit

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 557 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH

SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING 1 2 3


SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3

MEANING
0-3 CIRCUIT TRUNK KIND 4-7 CIRCUIT TRUNK KIND

OFF ON OFF ON

OFF OFF ON ON

OFF OFF OFF OFF

LD/DID EMT Not used 2W/4W E&M

LD/DID LD/DID Not used 2W/4W E&M

SW0 (SW10)

4 5 6 7 8

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON

Not used Fixed Fixed Fixed Not used Programmable PAD P0 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 8 dB Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB P0 value is determined as a sum of selected PAD values of SW1 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system. -ExampleSW1-1: ON SW1-2: OFF SW1-3: OFF SW1-4: ON SW1-5: ON (0.5 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 4 dB) ( 8 dB)

1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 SW1 (SW15) OFF 6 OFF Fixed

In this case P0 value is 12.5 dB.

<Setting Range of Programmable PAD Values>


PAD VALUE [dB] SEND RECEIVE

Possible Setting Range

P0: P2:

0 - +15.5 0.5 step 0 - +7.5 0.5 step

P1: P3:

0 - +15.5 0.5 step 0 - +7.5 0.5 step

7 8

OFF OFF

Not used Not used

CHAPTER 3 Page 558 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SW2 (SW20)

STANDARD SWITCH SETTING SETTING NO. ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF

MEANING Programmable PAD P1 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 8 dB Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB P1 value is determined as a sum of selected PAD values of SW2 (elements 1-5). Note that this setting is valid for 4W E&M system. - Example SW2-1: ON SW2-2: OFF SW2-3: OFF SW2-4: ON SW2-5: ON (0.5 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 0 dB) ( 4 dB) ( 8 dB)

In this case P1 value is 12.5 dB.

Fixed Fixed Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 559 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SW3 (SW25)

SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

MEANING Programmable PAD P2 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0.5 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 1 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 2 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 4 dB Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB P2 Values is total of PAD Values Note (Valid when 4W E&M system) (Ex) SW3-1: OFF SW3-2: ON SW3-3: OFF SW3-4: OFF in this case P2 value is 1 dB.

P3 Values is total of PAD Values Note (Valid when 4W E&M system) (Ex) SW3-5: OFF SW3-6: ON SW3-7: OFF SW3-8: OFF in this case P3 value is 1 dB.

Note:

For the setting range of Programmable PAD Values, see the Setting Range of Programmable PAD Values shown for SW1.

CHAPTER 3 Page 560 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit] SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as LD/DID)

STANDARD SWITCH SETTING SETTING NO.

MEANING

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network (Valid for LD/DID)


SW4/5 1 2 3 4 Terminating Impedance Balancing Network
1K

1~4

350

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF
600

2.16 F 0.21 F (EIA/TIA -464A) 600

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

5 6 7 8

OFF OFF OFF OFF

Fixed Not used Not used Not used

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 561 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SW4 (SW30 [No.0-3 Circuit] SW5 (SW40) [No. 4-7 Circuit] (When Trunk Kind has been set as 2W E&M)

SWITCH STANDARD SETTING NO. SETTING

MEANING

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network (Valid for E&M)


SW4/5 1 2 3 4 6 Terminating Impedance Balancing Network
1K

1 ~ 4, 6

350

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON
600

2.16 F 0.21 F (EIA/TIA -464A) 600

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

5 6

OFF ON OFF

Not used Speech Line: 2-wire Speech Line: 4-wire

OFF ON

Fixed E&M Control Idle: Ground E&M Control Idle: Open Busy: Battery Busy: Ground

8 OFF

CHAPTER 3 Page 562 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

Reference : Table of Fixed PADs


PAD VALUE [dB] ARTD COMMAND 4W E&M PAD DATA SEND 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 P0 3 6 12 16 P2 0 RECEIVE P1 3 6 11 11 P3 0 SEND 0 3 6 6 0 0 0 LD/2W E&M

1
RECEIVE 0 3 6 -6 -6 0 0 SEND 0 6 0 0 0 0 0

2
RECEIVE -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6

PAD VALUE [dB] APAD COMMAND 4W E&M PAD DATA SEND 1 2 3 4 5 15 3 6 12 16 P2 0 RECEIVE 3 6 11 11 P3 0 SEND 3 6 6 0 0 0 LD/2W E&M

1
RECEIVE 3 6 -6 -6 0 0 SEND 6 6 0 0 0 0

2
RECEIVE -6 -6 -6 -6 -6 -6

1 :When SW2-8 is set to ON. (other than the case of 2 ) 2 :When SW2-8 is set to OFF. (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Australia)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 563 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

6.

External Interface Accommodation of LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-172. See also: Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M) Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7) RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7) RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3 Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT3 LT4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7) RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3

A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7) RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 564 Revision 1.0 NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 3 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT3 LT4 RB0 RB1 RB2 RB3 M0 M1 M2 M3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 E0 E1 E2 E3

B0 (TB0) B1 (TB1) B2 (TB2) B3 (TB3) B4 (TB4) B5 (TB5) B6 (TB6) B7 (TB7)

A0 (TA0) A1 (TA1) A2 (TA2) A3 (TA3) A4 (TA4) A5 (TA5) A6 (TA6) A7 (TA7)

LT Connector Slot No.

LT1

LT2

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT8

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 565 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

LD/DID
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a LD or DID trunk.
PBX LT Connector PA-8TLTR A0 B0 Installation Cable MDF A B NETWORK

A7 B7

A B

2W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 2-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX ODT Connector PA-8TLTR LT Connector A0 B0 E0 M0 Installation Cable MDF A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

A3 B3 E3 M3 A4 B4 E4 M4 2400 ODT CABLE A7 B7 E7 M7

A B E M A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

A B E M 2-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID 2W E&M)

CHAPTER 3 Page 566 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

4W E&M
This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 4-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, RA, RB, and E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.
PBX ODT connector PA-8TLTR LT Connector
A0(TA0) B0(TB0) RA0 RB0 E0 M0

Installation Cable MDF

TA TB RA RB E M

4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

A4(TA4) B4(TB4) RA4 RB4 E4 M4

TA TB RA RB E M

4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

2400 ODT CABLE

A7(TA7) B7(TB7) RA7 RB7 E7 M7

TA TB RA RB E M

4-WIRE CARRIER EQUIPMENT

Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 567 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

2400 ODT CABLE


The "2400 ODT CABLE" has one ODT connector whose lead accommodation is shown below.

ODT Connector channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

Champ Connector RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7)

"2400 ODT CABLE"

"2400 ODT CABLE"

Champ Connector (Female)

34

LT 3m (10 feet)

To "ODT" connector

To MDF

Note:

Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.

Figure 3-175 2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation

CHAPTER 3 Page 568 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

2400 ODT CABLE-A


The "2400 ODT CABLE-A" has three ODT connectors whose lead accommodation is shown below.
ODT Connectors channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11A 12A 13A 14A 15A 16A 17A RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (NC) 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (NC) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Champ Connectors RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (DE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (DE) channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7

channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7

channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7 To ODT Connector

To MDF 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) RB4 M4 RB5 M5 RB6 M6 RB7 M7 (AS0) (AS1) (AS2) (AS3) (AS4) (AS5) (AS6) (AS7) (DE) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) RA4 E4 RA5 E5 RA6 E6 RA7 E7 (AL0) (AL1) (AL2) (AL3) (AL4) (AL5) (AL6) (AL7) (DE)

channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7

channel #4 channel #5 channel #6 channel #7

"2400 ODT CABLE-A"

Note:

Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.
Figure 3-176 2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 569 Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR Tie Line Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME MB (SW00)
OFF
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MODULE PIM

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

ON

MB0-7 (SW01)

ON

SW0 (SW10)

12 34 5 678

ON

SW1 (SW15)

12 34 5 678

ON

SW2 (SW20)

12 34 5 678

ON

SW3 (SW25)

12 34 5 678

ON

SW4 (SW30)

12 34 5 678

ON

SW5 (SW40)

12 34 5 678

ON

CHAPTER 3 Page 570 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

PA-M87
Recording / Paging Device Adapter
1. General Function This circuit card is used to provide an interface between the Attendant Console(s) and the external recording/paging equipment as shown in the figure below. Occupying every two slots within a PIM, a single interface adapter can handle a maximum of six ATTCONs and one-or two-circuit recording/paging equipment to combine. The connection patterns for the devices and service activation via ATTCONs can vary, depending on key settings on the card (see Section 5, 'Switch Settings' for details).

ATTCON

MDF MDF Recording Device

Max.6

RECC/PGADP or Paging Device ATTCON

MDF MDF Recording Device

Max.3

or Paging Device RECC/PGADP Recording Device or Paging Device

MDF Max.3

Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 571 Revision 1.0

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below. Note that this circuit card requires a vacancy of two consecutive slots.

Mounting Module
00 01 02 03 04

PIM
05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 Page 572 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors Face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-178.

SW12 SW13

ATT5 ATT4 ATT3 ATT2 ATT1 ATT0 VR0 VR1

SW11 SW10

SW15 REC/PGA (To MDF)

SW14

Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP)

4.

Lamp Indications The table below shows the meaning of lamp indications.

LAMP NAME

COLOR

MEANING

Provided that any of the ATTCONs has a connection to the Recording/Paging Green equipment via the card, the lamp(s) corresponding to the citedATTCON number(s) (Steady-ON) emit(s) steady light. ATT0 ~ ATT5 Green (Flash) Provided that any of the ATTCONs has not established a connection with the Recording/Paging equipment, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON number(s) emit(s) flashing light.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 573 Revision 1.0

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

5.

Switch Settings Switch settings on the card and their detailed meanings are as follows:
SWITCH NO. 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON STANDARD SETTING

SWITCH NAME

SETTING ON

MEANING Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop start (constant) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop start (momentary) Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop start (constant) No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine =6:1 Note 1 No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine = 3 : 1 2 sets Note 1 Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal sending (momentary) Note 2 Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal sending (constant) Note 2

SW10
ON 12 3 4 56 7 8

4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

Note 1: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW12 and SW13. Note 2: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.
PATTERN FOR START SIGNAL TRANSMISSION KEY SETTING (SW10-8) KEY SETTING (SW14, SW15)

Momentary Loop Start/Momentary Ground Start Constant Loop Start/Constant Ground Start Telephone Loop (Handset lifting)

ON OFF OFF

Up Up Down

CHAPTER 3 Page 574 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

SWITCH NAME SW11

SWITCH NO.

SETTING RIGHT

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Remote Phone is used.

3
LEFT Remote Phone is not used.

Left
SW12 SW13

Right
UP No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine =6:1 Note 4

3 2 1
SW14 SW15

UP
DOWN No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine = 3 : 1 2 sets Note 4

DOWN

1 2 3

UP

UP

Patterns for Recording/Paging activation: by loop start/ground start signal sending Note 3 Patterns for Recording/Paging activation: via the telephone loop (handset lifting) Note 3

DOWN

DOWN

VR0 Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 1st circuit of Recording/Paging machine. (Volume Resistance) VR1 Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for 2nd circuit of Recording/Paging machine. (Volume Resistance)

Warning:

When the Remote Phone is not used, be sure to turn the SW11 to the left side. If the switch key is left on the right side, the machine components may be damaged by over current.

Note 3: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required. Note 4: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW10-7.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 575 Revision 1.0

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

6.

External Interface The location of REC/PGA connector leads and their connection diagram are shown in Figure 3-179.

Location of REC/PGA Connector Leads

CHAMP Connector (J) REC/PGA


26 B0 27 M0B 28 K0B 29 B1 30 M1B 31 K1B 32 B2 33 M2B 34 K2B 35 B3 36 M3B 37 K3B 38 B4 39 M4B 40 K4B 41 B5 42 M5B 43 K5B 44 ZB 45 L0B 46 L1B 47 T0B 48 T1B 49 50 1 A0 2 M0A 3 K0A 4 A1 5 M1A 6 K1A 7 A2 8 M2A 9 K2A 10 A3 11 M3A 12 K3A 13 A4 14 M4A 15 K4A 16 A5 17 M5A 18 K5A 19 ZA 20 L0A 21 L1A 22 T0A 23 T1A 24 T0C 25 T1C

For ATT #0 For ATT #1 For ATT #2 For ATT #3 For ATT #4 For ATT #5 For Recording/Paging Machine #0

For Recording/Paging Machine #1 Note

Note: These leads are used when the two - circuit system is adopted for the Recording/Paging service features (No. of ATTCON: Output Equipment = 3 : 1 2 circuits).

Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-180)

CHAPTER 3 Page 576 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging activation]

PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT

Front connector

50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
Note 1 Note 2

To Recording/ Speech Signal Paging machine Leads Note 3 Telephone Terminal Side Leads

Note 1: For speech signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 3: There is restriction here in case a Recording machine is used: The Recording machine should be the type which is fixed between the Central Office and telephone terminals.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 577 Revision 1.0

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ]

PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT

Front connector

50FLT-CHAMP CABLE
Note 1 Note 2

To Recording/ Speech Signal Paging machine Leads Loop Start Leads Ground Start Leads

Note 1: For speech signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment. Note 2: For control signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4)

CHAPTER 3 Page 578 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case 7 or more ATTCONs are connected to a single Recording/Paging machine ]

PBX RECC/ PGADP Front connector RECC/ PGADP

50FLT-CHAMP CABLE A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C ZA ZB L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C ZA ZB A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B

MDF KA KB LA LB A B To ATT

To Recording/ Paging machine

50FLT-CHAMP CABLE

Note 2

Note 1

KA KB LA LB A B

To ATT

Note 1: To use a single Recording/Paging machine for 7 or more ATTCONs, the necessary number of PA-M87 card(s) must be reinforced, according the ATT number, on the side of the ICS. If this is the case, provide relevant multiple connections between the first-card connector leads and the leads due for the reinforced circuit card(s). Note that the connection should be performed on the MDF and each connector lead name must be identical in each connection proccess. (example) L0A (below) T0A (below) L0A (above) T0A (above) L0B (below) T0B (below) L0B (above) T0B (above)

Note 2: When performing the multiple connections, the leads here (ZA and ZB) must be given another multiple connection in addition to that required in a normal pattern (refer to Note 1).
Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 579 Revision 1.0

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

[ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ]

PBX RECC/ PGADP A0 B0 M0A M0B K0A K0B L0A L0B T0A T0B T0C MDF A B M E To TLT E&M Signal Leads

Front connector

50FLT-CHAMP CABLE

To Paging Speech Signal Machine Leads Loop Start Leads Note

Note : When the Paging machine is to be activated by the ground start, connect the T0B lead to the ground.

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4)

CHAPTER 3 Page 580 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-M87 Recording / Paging Device Adapter

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SWITCH NAME

SW10

ON

12 3 4 56 7 8

1
SW11

Left

Right UP

3
SW12 SW13

2 1
3

DOWN
UP

SW14 SW15

2 1
DOWN

VR0 (Volume Resistance)

VR1 (Volume Resistance)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 581 Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

PA-24PRTB-A
Primary Rate Interface Trunk
1. General Function The PA-24PRTB-A (PRT) circuit card is a digital interface supporting voice and data communications at 1.5 M bit/sec. Being equipped with a Link Access Procedure for a D channel (LAP D) controller based on the ITU-T I/Q series, this card provides a Primary Rate Access Interface (PRI) with the system. A built-in resonance circuit extracts clock signals, which are supplied from the network, so that the system may be in exact synchronization with the network. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is also equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Speech Path (PCM Signal) D-channel Signaling Link

INT

TSW

INT 24ch 2-wire T 2-wire R 24PRT 1.544MHz Clock Extraction from Network PLO ISDN NETWORK

I/O Local Bus

System Clock CPU

Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 582 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

2.

Mounting Location / Condition The PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) card can be mounted in the following shaded universal slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note:

This card cannot be mounted in slot 5. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-182.
SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Note Universal Slots Universal Slots

3.

OPE N-OPE MB
PCM BER AIS DOPE PKT 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT LYR

LB MODE BL23

SW0 SW1 CN2

BL00

Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3 Page 583 Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.
Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM PER RMT AIS DOPE LYR RKT BL00

COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Green Green Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights when input signal down is detected (PCM LOSS). Lights when frame alignment loss is detected. Lights when a CRC error occur frequently. Lights on receiving Remote Alarm Indication (RAI). Lights on detection of AIS. Remains lit while the D Channel Controller is on. Lights when the link of the D channel is set up. Lights when the packet of the D channel is in use. Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. (When BL23 is in used as D channel, lamp is always on.)

BL23

CHAPTER 3 Page 584 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME MB

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel AT&T (#4/#5 ESS) NT DMS 100/DMS 250 Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172) Internal loop back set

MODE

5 7 10

LB 0

ON OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF

Internal loop back cancel Line loop back set Line loop back cancel Payload loop back set Payload loop back cancel D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request cancel Impedance 100 Impedance 110 Send transformer middle point Ground

SW0 1

ON OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 ON

Send transformer middle point Open Receive transformer middle point Ground Receive transformer middle point Open Fixed

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 585 Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH NAME
SW1

SWITCH NO.
1 2 3

SETTING
OFF ON ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING
Standard setting (Digital PAD/ROM selection) Fixed Interface structure: 24B Interface structure: 23B + D D channel packet service is provided. D channel packet service is not provided.
SETTING OF EQUALIOZER SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 DISTANCE

4 OFF SW2 1

3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF SW3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF Other combinations

0 ~ 40m 40 ~ 80m 80 ~ 120m 120 ~ 160m 160 ~ 200m Not allowed

24-Multiframe Zero Suppress Select B8ZS (24-multiframe) Standard setting Standard setting Line fault is notified to the upper CPU. Line fault is not notified to the upper CPU. Fixed Fixed Alarm processing select Fixed to OFF Main Signal All 1 supervision is not made. Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed

CHAPTER 3 Page 586 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH NAME SW4

SWITCH NO. 1 2 3

SETTING OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Fixed (D channel) D Channel Mode Selection; Used Side D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side D Channel Signal Logic; Negative

D Channel Signal Logic; Positive (Standard)


SW4-4 SW4-5 D-channel Speed

5 6 7 8 SW5 1

ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

64 kbps (Standard) Not used 56 kbps Not used

Fixed Fixed Fixed PAD Pattern Selection


SW5-1 SW5-2 SW5-3 PAD Pattern

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)

Note:

When setting this switch, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.


SW5-5 DIGITAL PAD CONTROL

SW5-4

ON ON OFF OFF
SW5-6

ON OFF ON OFF
SW5-7

Both directions Receive only (Standard) Send only ARTD Fixed


DATA PAD CONTROL

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

64 k (Standard) 56 k AT & T 64 k INV. 48 k PROTIMS

IDLE code is sent out.

IDLE code is not sent out.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 587 Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24PRTB-A

This card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 5 (elements 1, 2, 3) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA ARTD PAD PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE 1 2 3 4 5 7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] -3 [dB] Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]

PAD value complies with key settings of SW5-6,7. (Irrelevant to PAD patterns) 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

Note:

- represents GAIN in this table.

CHAPTER 3 Page 588 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

6.

External Interface

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT6 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 E RB POUTB TB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

LT Connector Slot No.

LT2

LT4

LT5

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-184).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 589 Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24PRTB-A circuit card is as follows.


MDF PBX To DSU (Digital Service Unit)

24 PRT IN OUT

RA RB TA TB POUTA POUTB

RA RB TA TB

PLO

DIU1A DIU1B

clock extraction

Note

Note:

As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information on the PLO card, see Chapter 2 in this manual.
Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 590 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24PRTB-A Primary Rate Interface Trunk

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MODULE PIM

MODE

LB

3 2 1 0 ON ON 1234

SW0

ON

SW1

1234

ON

12345678

SW2

ON

12345678

SW3

ON

12345678

SW4

ON

12345678

SW5

MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 591 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

PA-24DTR (DTI)
Digital Trunk Interface
1. General Function The PA-24DTR (24DTI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at 1.544 Mbit/s. This card can be also used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) or an ISDN network when being connected to an additional CCH or DCH circuit card with a flat cable as illustrated below. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Note CCH/DCH

INT

TSW

INT 24ch

Flat Cable

2 T 2 R DTI(PA-24DTR) 1.544MHz Clock Extraction (for a PLO-secondary office)


DIGITAL NETWORK

I/O Local Bus CPU

System Clock PLO

: Common Channel Signaling Link : Speech Path (PCM signal) : Clock Signal

Note:

When PA-24DTR is used in an Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling (ACIS) system, CCH/DCH is not required.

Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System

CHAPTER 3 Page 592 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24DTR (DTI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 593 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-186. Note that there are two types of PA-24DTR (DTI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

OPE N-OPE SW00


PCM BER AIS 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT

SW01

BL23 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 BL00 SW15 SW14 CN2

SW4D

SW5D

OPE N-OPE SW6C MB


PCM BER AIS 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT

SW39

SW13B

BL23 SW58 SW25

BL00 CN2

Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI)

CHAPTER 3 Page 594 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS BL00

COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS). Lights in the case of frame alignment loss. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BL23

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 595 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SW01/13B

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Internal Loopback : Set

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Internal Loopback : Cancel External Loopback : Set External Loopback : Cancel Payload Loopback : Set Payload Loopback : Cancel All Channel Make Busy : Set Note All Channel Make Busy : Cancel

Note:

This switch setting is applicable for a system adopts Associated Channel Interoffice Signalling (ACIS).

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
Payload Loopback External Loopback (Line Loopback)

PA-24 DTR (DTI) TDSW Interface Line Interface R Speech Path T DIGITAL NETWORK Speech Path Control Block

Framer

Switch

Internal Loopback

Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

PAD

CHAPTER 3 Page 596 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH NAME SW15/25

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Impedance Setting: 100 [] Impedance Setting: 110 [] Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

OFF ON

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open Idle Code: To be sent out Not to be sent out PAD Control

OFF ON

4 SW11/39 1

OFF ON OFF ON

SW11/39-1

SW11/39-2

PAD Control

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

Bothway Receive only (Send 0dB) Send only (Receive 0dB) Fixed to ARTD command

Data PAD Control


SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

64 Kbps 56 Kbps 48 Kbps 64 Kbps INV

T Signal Control
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

R Signal Control
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 597 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH NAME SW10/4D

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS (For NEAX2400 ICS) Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification. (For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.) Equalizer Setting
SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance

OFF ON

OFF ON OFF

ON OFF

ON OFF ON

7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON

ON ON ON ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON Other Combinations

ON OFF ON OFF ON

0~133 (ft)/0~40 (m) 133~267 (ft)/40~80 (m) 267~400 (ft)/80~120 (m) 400~533(ft)/120~160 (m) 533~667(feet)/ 160~200(m) Impossible

CHAPTER 3 Page 598 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH NAME SW12/58

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING PAD Pattern Selection


SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5

MEANING

4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW14/5D 1 OFF 2 ON OFF ON 3 OFF ON OFF ON

SW12/58-6

PAD Pattern

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Note:

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Other Combinations

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Loss (Bothway) Loss (Receive) Impossible

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.


SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 Setting is OFF.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive Note: LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault. Zero Code Suppression is not provided. Zero Code Suppression is provided.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 599 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH NAME SW13/6C

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

Fixed to all ON.

Netfusing : Not used Netfusing : used

CHAPTER 3 Page 600 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DTI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - CDN=30(PAD). The PAD patterns and ARTD data correspond as listed below.
PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) PAD DATA ARTD CDN=30 PAD Pattern 1 SEND 1 2 3 4 5 7 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] RECEIVE 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] PAD Pattern 2 SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Bothway) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Receive) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Bothway) SEND RECEIVE A Loss (Receive) SEND 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through RECEIVE 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] Through

-3 [dB] 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Note 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8[dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] Key settings of SW 11/39 - 3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD patterns). 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through

Note:

- represents GAIN in this table.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 601 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

6.

External Interface The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 E 36 37 RB 38 POUTB 39 40 41 TB 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 E 27 28 RB 29 30 POUTB 31 32 33 TB 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA

E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

LT4

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-189).

CHAPTER 3 Page 602 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DTI) circuit card is as follows.
PBX MDF DTI OUT IN TA TB RA RB POUTA POUTB Note 1 PLO DIU1A DIU1B Note 2 TA TB RA RB CARRIER EQUIPMENT

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side. Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.


Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 603 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI) Digital Trunk Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW01/13B
3 2 1 0 ON

MODULE PIM

SWITCH SHAPE

REMARKS

SW10/4D

4-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 12345678

ON

12345678

12-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 12345678

SW11/39

24-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 12345678

ON

12345678

12-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 12345678

SW13/6C

ON

12345678

Fixed to all ON.

SW12/58

ON

12345678 Note

Note:

Equalizer Setting

SW15/25

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14/5D
ON

24-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 1234

1 2 3 4

12-multiframe DTI Standard


ON 1234

SW00/MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3 Page 604 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

PA-24DTR (DLI)
Digital Line Interface
1. General Function The PA-24DTR (24DLI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital lines and the system at 1.544 Mbit/s. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings.
Note:

The key settings become valid when SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1.

INT

TSW

INT 24ch T R DLI(PA-24DTR)


TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

I/O Local Bus CPU

: Speech Path (PCM signal) : Clock Signal

Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 605 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

2.

Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24DTR (DLI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

Mounting Module

PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots

Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3 Page 606 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

3.

Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-191. Note that there are two types of PA-24DTR (DLI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

OPE N-OPE SW00


PCM BER AIS 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT

SW01

BL23 SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10

BL00 SW15 SW14 CN2

SW4D

SW5D

OPE N-OPE SW6C MB


PCM BER AIS 3 2 1 0 FRM RMT

SW39

SW01

BL23 SW58 SW25

BL00 CN2

Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI)

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 607 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

4.

Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME OPE N-OPE PCM FRM BER RMT AIS BL00

COLOR Green Red Red Red Red Red Yellow Green Flash OFF

STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS). Lights in the case of frame alignment loss. Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe. Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication. Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS). Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM). Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BL23

CHAPTER 3 Page 608 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

5.

Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SW01/13B

SWITCH NO.

SETTING UP DOWN ON

STANDARD SETTING Circuit card make busy

MEANING

Circuit card make busy cancel Internal Loopback : Set Internal Loopback : Cancel External Loopback : Set External Loopback : Cancel Payload Loopback : Set Payload Loopback : Cancel Not used (Fixed to OFF)

0 OFF ON 1 OFF ON 2 OFF 3 OFF

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.
Payload Loopback External Loopback (Line Loopback)

PA-24 DTR (DLI) TDSW Interface Line Interface R Speech Path T TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Speech Path Control Block

Framer

Switch

Internal Loopback

Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

PAD

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 609 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

SWITCH NAME

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Impedance Setting: 100 [] Impedance Setting: 110 [] Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

2 OFF SW15/25 ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 1 OFF 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF ON 5 SW11/39 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF

Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open Idle Code: To be sent out Not to be sent out One Digit Dialing: Valid

One Digit Dialing: Invalid Not used (Fixed to OFF) Not used (Fixed to OFF) Not used (Fixed to OFF) T Signal Control
SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

R Signal Control
SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control

ON OFF ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF

ABCD ABAB Bit Steal Inhibited AAAA

CHAPTER 3 Page 610 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

SWITCH NAME SW10/4D

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out Not used (Fixed to OFF) Data Link Control: MOS Data Link Control: BOS Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion) Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution) When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for North America specification. (For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.) Equalizer Setting
SW12/58-1 ON ON ON ON OFF SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 ON OFF ON OFF ON Distance 0~133 (feet)/0~40 (m) 133~267 (feet)/40~80 (m) 267~400 (feet)/80~120 (m) 400~533 (feet)/120~160 (m) 533~667 (feet)/160~200 (m) Impossible

2 OFF ON 3 OFF 4 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW12/58 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON OFF ON

ON ON OFF OFF ON Other Combinations

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 611 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

SWITCH NAME SW12/58

SWITCH NO.

SETTING ON

STANDARD SETTING PAD Pattern Selection

MEANING

4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF SW14/5D 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON

SW12/58-4

SW12/58-5

SW12/58-6

PAD Pattern

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Note:

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Other Combinations

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) Loss (Bothway) Loss (Receive) Impossible

When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.


SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm

ON ON OFF OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

Alarm is not sent out All 1 RMT

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 standard Setting is OFF.) Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM Spec.)

Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK ROM Spec.) LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault. Zero Code Suppression is not provided. Zero Code Suppression is provided.

CHAPTER 3 Page 612 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

SWITCH NAME SW13/6C

SWITCH NO. 1

SETTING ON OFF ON

STANDARD SETTING

MEANING Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Valid

Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Invalid Ringer Control: Continuous Ringer Control: Intermittent Sending PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON 4 OFF ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note:

SW13/6C-3

SW13/6C-4

SW13/6C-5

PAD Value

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

Receiving PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

SW13/6C-6

SW13/6C-7

SW13/6C-8

PAD Value

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON

OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON

0 dB 2 dB 4 dB 6 dB 8 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

This PAD value table is PAD pattern 1. If other PAD pattern is required, assign PAD pattern by elements 4~6 of SW12/58. The elements become valid when assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1. When ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=0, PAD value is 0dB.

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 613 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DLI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card.
SW13/6C SEND-3,4,5 RECEIVE-6,7,8 3 6 4 7 5 SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE 8 PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 PAD Pattern (selected by key setting) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive) A Loss (Bothway) A Loss (Receive)

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] 2 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB]

0 [dB] -3 [dB]
Note

0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 6 [dB] 9 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 6 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 12 [dB] 8 [dB]

OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF

3 [dB] 0 [dB] 3 [dB]

Note:

- represents GAIN in this table.

CHAPTER 3 Page 614 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

6.

External Interface The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Mounting Module

PIM
Accommodated in 2 LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 E 36 37 RB 38 POUTB 39 40 41 TB 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT1 LT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT3 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Accommodated in 3 LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT8

Accommodated in 1 LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector 26 E 27 28 RB 29 30 POUTB 31 32 33 TB 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 E RA POUTA TA

E RA POUTA TA

E RB POUTB TB

E RA POUTA TA

LT4

LT5

LT6

LT7

LT9 LT10 LT11

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20

Group No.

PIM

Highway Block

HW0

HW1

HW2

HW3 HW4 HW5

HW6

HW7

HW8

HW9 HW10 HW11

Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-194).

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 615 Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DLI) circuit card is as follows.

PBX MDF DLI OUT IN TA TB RA RB TA TB RA RB TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram

CHAPTER 3 Page 616 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296

PA-24DTR (DLI) Digital Line Interface

7.

Switch Setting Sheet


SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SW00 (MB) SWITCH SHAPE
ON

MODULE PIM

REMARKS

SW01/13B
3 2 1 0 ON

SW10/4D

24-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 12345678

ON

12345678

12-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 12345678

SW11/39

24-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 12345678

ON

12345678

12-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 12345678

SW13/6C

ON

12345678

SW12/58

ON

12345678 Note

Note:

Equalizer Setting

SW15/25

ON

1 2 3 4

SW14/5D
ON

24-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 1234

1 2 3 4

12-multiframe DLI Standard


ON 1234

SW00/MB

DOWN

Circuit card make busy cancel

NDA-24296

CHAPTER 3 Page 617 Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3 Page 618 Revision 1.0

NDA-24296